Ensoniq ks 32 user manual english sortof by CoolCuttle

Page 1

WEIGHTED ACTION MIDI STUDIO Anual V ersion. 1 0

Page 2

KS-32 Manual:

Written, designed and illustrated by: Into German by:

Tom Tracy, Jim Boggia, Suzanne Kuldell, Bill McCutcheon, Jon O. Sr. and Bill Whipple Arnd Kaiser All information provided without guarantee

Page 3 Contents

KS-32 user guide

Contents Initiation Willkommen!.............................................................................................i - 1 The synthesizer ................................................ ......................................... i - 1 The sequencer ................................................ ........................................... i - 2 MIDI master keyboard ............................................... ................................ i - 2 Storage ................................................. .............................................. i - 2 The instruction manual ................................................ .......................... i - 3 Power Ups ................................................. ............................................... i - 3 Power supply - grounding ............................................... ........................ i - 3 Voltage conditions ................................................. ............................. i - 3 Chill Guidelines ................................................ .............................. i - 4 The KS-32 in a hi-fi system ......................................... ...................... i - 5 Turning the KS-32 in a MIDI connection ...................................... i - 5 Low Battery Voltage - When the battery must be replaced ...... i - 5 Re-initialization of the KS-32 ........................................... .......................... i - 6 When re-initialized should be ............................................ ................ i - 6

Part 1 - Tutorial

Anschluß...................................................................................................1 - 1 Power Ups ................................................. .............................................. 1-2 To select a program ............................................... ................................ 1-2 Sound storage areas ................................................ ........................... 1-3 Select a basic sound editing on ........................... 1-6 Select a voice for editing on ........................................ 1-6 Selecting a waveform ............................................... .......... 1-6 Selects effects ............................................... ................................. 1-7 Save a new sound .............................................. ................... 1-8 Discard changes in sound ................................................ ............... 1-9 Get Out ................................................. ............................................... 1-9 Copy of a sound at a different location ....................... 1 - 10 Sequencer Basics ............................................... ............................ 1 - 10 Record Other Tracks ............................................... ...................... 1-13 Reworking of tracks ............................................... ..................: 1 - 14 Master MIDI controller functions ........................................... .......... 1 - 15 The pattern presets .............................................. ...................................: 1 - 16 Create splits and layers ............................................. .................: 1 - 16

Part 2 - Overview Ports on the back .............................................. ..................... 2 - 2 MIDI Thru ............................................... ....................................... 2 - 2 MIDI Out ............................................... ......................................... 2 - 2 MIDI In ............................................... ............................................ 2 - 2 Foot switch input ............................................. .............................. 2 - 2 Memory card slot ............................................. ....................... 2 - 3 Pedal / CV ............................................... .......................................... 2 - 3 Right / Mono output ............................................. ............................ 2 - 3 Left / Mono output ............................................. .............................. 2 - 3

Table of Contents - 1

Page 4 KS-32 user guide

Contents Headphones ................................................. ................................................. 2 - 4 Performance controllers ............................................... ............................. 2-4 The front panel - Communication with the KS-32 ........................ 2-5 The Select Sound button ............................................ ....................... 2 - 6 The edit sound button ............................................ .......................... 2 - 6 The BankSet button .............................................. ............................. 2 - 6 The Bank buttons .............................................. ................................ 2 - 7 The screen buttons .............................................. .............................. 2 - 7 The Select Sequence / Preset button .......................................... ......... 2 - 8 The Edit Sequence / Preset button .......................................... ............ 2 - 8 The Edit track button ............................................ ........................... 2 - 8 The track buttons .............................................. ............................... 2 - 8 The drive buttons .............................................. ......................... 2 - 9 The Replace-track sound button .......................................... ........... 2 - 9 The make-default preset button .......................................... ............. 2 - 9 The System • MIDI button ............................................ ...................... 2 - 9 The MIDI connections .............................................. ........................... 2-10 Control external MIDI devices - MIDI connectors .......................... 2-10 MIDI mode and channel for MIDI-controlled instruments ...................... 2 - 11 MIDI Track Configuration ............................................. ........................ 2 - 11 Parametric programming ................................................ .............. 2 - 12 Change a parameter ............................................... ..................... 2 - 13 About this Guide ............................................... ............................... 2 - 14 KS-32 Accessories .............................................. .......................................... 2-15

Part 3 - System • MIDI settings Master Tune ............................................... ............................................... 3 - 2 Global Bend ............................................... ............................................... 3 - 2 Touch ........................................................................................................3 - 2 FtswL - Foot Switch Left ........................................... ............................ 3-7 Pedal..........................................................................................................3 - 8 MIDI parameters ............................................... ......................................... 3-9 Base Channel ............................................... ............................................. 3-9 Based channel MIDI Status ............................................. ............................. 3-10 Based channel Afterouch type ............................................. ......................... 3-10 MIDI Mode - MIDI In Fashion ......................................... ..................... 3-11 MONO mode ............................................... ........................................... 3-12 Global controller in MONO mode ........................................... .......... 3-12 XCtrl - Remote Controller ............................................. ........................ 3-12 Controllers...............................................................................................3 - 13 ENSONIQ Bank's Special "tax" -Programmwechselbefehle ........ 3-14 Selecting a new sequence / song-effect via MIDI ......................... 3-14 Excl System - System Exclusive messages ........................................ 3 - 15

Excl System - System Exclusive messages ........................................ 3 - 15 MIDI Trk Name ............................................. ......................................... 3 - 16 MIDI-Loop..............................................................................................3 - 16

Part 4 - Effects To understand the KS-32 effects ........................................... .............. 4 - 1 Sound effects ............................................... ............................................ 4 - 2 Preset / Sequence / Song Effects ........................................... ....................... 4 - 2 The programming of the effects .............................................. ................ 4 - 2 The effects loops ................................................ ......................................... 4 - 3 Mixture of effects ............................................... ................................. 4 - 4 Selects effects ............................................... ................................. 4 - 5 Sounds and presets ............................................... ..................................... 4 - 5 Table of Contents - 2

Page 5 Contents

KS-32 user guide When will new effects loaded into the ESP chip? ........................... 4 - 5 Assignment of sounds and effects in the Sequence / Preset Mode ............ 4 - 6 Modulation effect ................................................ .................................... 4 - 6 Ramps.......................................................................................................4 - 8 Controller assignment of effects ............................................... ............... 4-9 Effect parameters ............................................... ....................................... 4-9 CONCERT REVERB ................................................ ................... 4 - 10 8-VOICE.CHORUS ............................................. ......................... 4-11 PHASE SHIFTER ................................................ ........................ 4-12 CHORUS & REVERB ............................................... .................. 4 - 13 Flanger + REVERB.1 & 2 ........................................... ............. 4 - 13 PHASER + REVERB ............................................... ...................... 4-14 ROTORY SPKR + VERB .............................................. ................ 4 - 16 DIST + CHORUS + VERB ............................................. ................. 4-17 CMPRSS + DIST + VERB ............................................. .................. 4-18

Part 5 - The Basics of sound programming What is a sound? .................................................. ................................. 5 - 1 Voices and consistency ............................................... ......................... 5 - 1 Compare - About the Compare button / LED ......................................... .... 5-2 The Edit-Buffer.........................................................................................5 - 2 How to save new sounds ............................................. .................. 5 - 3 How to copy sounds .............................................. ............................ 5 - 4

Part 6 - Standard Sound Programming KS-32 standard sound structure .......................................... ..................... 6 - 2 Modulators ................................................. ............................................ 6 - 3 About modulation ................................................ ............................. 6 - 3 Selecting a modulator ............................................... ................ 6 - 3 Modulation Amount - yes or no modulation ............................. 6 - 4 Modulation sources ................................................. ....................... 6 - 4 The Sound Edit mode ............................................ .................................. 6 - 8 Wave-Bank...............................................................................................6 - 8 Select Voice / Voice-status ............................................. ................ 6 - 9 Wave-class ............................................... .................................... 6 - 10 Individual Waves ............................................... ........................... 6-12 Delay time ............................................... ...................................... 6-13 Home Index ............................................... ..................................... 6-13 Loop Length ............................................... .................................. 6 - 14 Voice Restrike Decay Time ........................................... .............. 6 - 14 Change sound mode ............................................. ....................... 6 - 14 Pitch Bank ............................................... ............................................... 6 - 15 Oct.................................................................................................6 - 15 Env1 ................................................. ............................................. 6 - 15 Mod Source ............................................... ................................... 6-16 Keyboard Pitch tracking ............................................. ................ 6-16 Glide ................................................. ............................................ 6-16 ENV 1, ENV 2, AMP (Envelope 3) - The KS-32 envelope ............. 6-18 Levl - Level ............................................... ................................. 6-19 Time ................................................. ............................................. 6-20 Levv - Dynamic Level Control .......................................... 6-21 Fashion - (ENV 1 and ENV 2) ......................................... ............. 6-22 MODE (AMP) - Parts trigger .......................................... ..6 - 22 KeyboardTrk - keyboard control .............................................. 6 - 23 Select Defaults ............................................... ............................... 6-24 Table of Contents - 3

Page 6 KS-32 user guide

Contents The LFO Bank .............................................. ........................................... 6-25 LFO speed ............................................... ..................................... 6-25 Noise-rate ............................................... ...................................... 6-25 Level - LFO level ............................................. ......................... 6-26 Wave ................................................. ............................................. 6-26 The filter bank .............................................. ......................................... 6-28 Filter1 - Filter-1 mode ........................................... ..................... 6-28 Filter configurations ............................................... .................... 6-29 FC1 Cutoff - Filter-1 cutoff frequency ....................................... 6 - 30 FC1 Keyboard ................................................ ............................... 6-30 Mod Source ............................................... .................................... 6-30 FC2 Cutoff - Filter-2 cutoff frequency ....................................... 6 - 31 FC2 Keyboard ................................................ ............................... 6-31 The Env2 and amp benches ............................................ .......................... 6-31 The output Bank .............................................. ....................................... 6-32 Volume - Voice volume ............................................. ........... 6-32 Mod Source - Volume modulator .......................................... 6 - 32 KeybdScale - Keyboard-scale intensity (or zone) ................ 6-33 Output bus ............................................... ..................................... 6-33 Pan - Pan position ............................................... ................. 6-34

Part 7 - drum sound programming The KS-32 drum sound construction ......................................... ..................... 7 - 1 Selecting the drum sound Edit ........................................... ....................... 7 - 1 The Sound Edit mode ............................................ ................................... 7 - 2 The Wave Bank .............................................. ........................................... 7 - 2 Current note number .............................................. ................... 7 - 2 Key-Range - Low-Key / high-key ....................................... ......... 7 - 3 How to "gaps" in the Key Map opens ..................................... 7 - 3 Wave-class ............................................... ....................................... 7 - 4 Wave-name ............................................... ...................................... 7 - 5 Direction ................................................. ......................................... 7 - 5 Clear-key-mapped ............................................. ................................... 7 - 5 Change sound mode ............................................. .......................... 7 - 6 The Pitch-Bank..........................................................................................7 - 6 Oct ................................................. .................................................. 7 - 6 Keyboard Pitch tracking ............................................. ................... 7 - 7 The filter bank .............................................. ........................................... 7 - 7 Fc cutoff - filter cutoff frequency .......................................... ..... 7 - 7 Gate time ............................................... ......................................... 7 - 8 Levv - Velocity-level control ........................................... ......... 7 - 8 Voice stealing ............................................... .............................. 7 - 8 The output Bank .............................................. ......................................... 7-9 Volume - Voice volume ............................................. ............. 7-9 Output bus ............................................... ....................................... 7-9 Utilization of the General MIDI drum maps ......................................... .7 - 10 Use of performance presets ............................................. ................ 7-11

Table of Contents - 4

Page 7 Contents

KS-32 user guide

Effects and Presets ............................................... .................................... 8-5 About track performance parameter ............................................ ........... 8-6 Layer-Lock ............................................... ................................................ 8 - 6 The "Make Default Preset" (Copy Preset) Functions ............................ 8 - 7 Select Sound Mode (Make-default preset) ....................................... ........... 8 - 7 In the Sequence / Preset Mode (Copy Preset) The Edit Track screens ............................................ .............................. 8 - 10 Vol - Volume ............................................... ........................................ 8 - 10 Pan - Panorama ............................................... ..................................... 8 - 10 Output.....................................................................................................8 - 10 Key-Range..............................................................................................8 - 11 Transpose................................................................................................8 - 11 Chan - MIDI Channel ............................................. ............................. 8-12 Prog - MIDI program number ............................................ ............ 8-12 Program change in the KS-32 ............................................. ..................... 8-13 ENSONIQ Bank's special "tax" Program Change messages ........ 8-13 Selecting a new sequence / song-effect via MIDI ......................... 8-13 MIDI-Status............................................................................................8 - 14 Pressure - Aftertouch ............................................... ............................ 8 - 14 Sustain pedal ............................................... ........................................... 8-15 Timbre ....................................................................................................8 - 15 Release....................................................................................................8 - 16

Part 9 - Sequencer Basics Introduction - What you need to know about presets ................................. 9-1 Digital sequencer ................................................ ................................... 9 - 2 What is a Sequence? .................................................. ............................ 9 - 3 What's that sound? .................................................. ................................... 9 - 3 The sequencer "drive functions" ............................................. ........ 9-4 The sequencer status .............................................. ................................. 9-5 Sequencer and Song benches ............................................. ......................... 9-5 Selecting a sequence / a song ............................................ .... 9-6 Playing a sequence / a song ............................................ 9-6 How to create a new sequence ............................................ .............. 9-7 How to create a new song How to delete the entire sequencer memory ................................. 9-8 Recording a sequence ............................................... ........................... 9 - 9 "Punch In" in a track ........................................... ............................... 9-11 Play an active sequence / try Sounds .................... 9-12 Recording MIDI tracks ............................................. ..................... 9-12 Track volume functions - mixing, mute, solo ......... 9-13 The Song Mode .............................................. ........................................ 9-15 Effect - switching in Song mode ........................................... 9-15

Table of Contents - 5

Page 8 KS-32 user guide

Contents Song Tracks ............................................... .................................... 9-17 Sequence control of tracks in the Song Mode ........................... 9-18 Blending sequence and song tracks in Song Mode ........ 9-19 Notes to the mixdown mode ............................................. 9-20

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming The locate Bank .............................................. ....................................... 10 - 2 Sequence Locate ............................................... ............................ 10 - 2 Song Locate ............................................... .................................... 10-3 Seq-Punch-In - The use of the Auto Punch function .............. 10-4 Editing the times in the Song mode ........................................... ... 10-5 Adjustment of the positions in real-time ........................................... 10 - 5 Seq-Punch-Out ............................................. ................................. 10-6 Auto Punch ............................................... ..................................... 10-6 Tap Tempo ............................................... ..................................... 10-6 Tempo - song tempo offset ........................................... ........ 10-6 The Control Bank .............................................. ...................................... 10-7 Loop...............................................................................................10 - 7 Step Entry ............................................... ....................................... 10-7 Record - The record mode ............................................ .......... 10-10 Auto Punch ............................................... ................................... 10-10 Song uses Effect from .............................................. ................... 10-10 Song Edit Tracks Displayed ........................................... ............ 10 - 11 Save Changes mode ............................................. ...................... 10-12 About the "Save Changes?" - Screen ......................................... .... 10-12 Total Sequencer Free memory (display only) ............................ 10 - 13 Reinitialize sequencer ............................................... .................. 10-14 The Click Bank .............................................. ....................................... 10-14 Click ................................................. ........................................... 10-14 Click-volume ............................................... ............................... 10-14 Tempo ................................................. ......................................... 10-15 The Song Bank - Song Edit functions ........................................ .... 10-16

Create-song ............................................... .................................. 10-16 Copy song ............................................... .................................... 10-17 Erase Song / Preset ............................................. ........................... 10-17 Song information ............................................... ......................... 10 - 18 Rename Song / Preset ............................................. ...................... 10 - 18 Copy Preset Data ............................................. ........................... 10 - 19 Edit the Song Steps - The Song Step Editor .............. 10 - 20 Editing Song steps - The Song step editor ........... 10-22 The Seq Commands Bank ............................................ ......................... 10-24 Create-Sequence / Preset ............................................. .................. 10-24 Copy Sequence ............................................... ............................. 10-25 Erase Sequence / Preset ............................................. .................... 10-26 Sequence information ............................................... .................. 10-26 Rename Sequence / Preset ............................................. ............... 10-27 Copy Preset Data ............................................. ........................... 10-27 Append Sequence ............................................... ......................... 10-28 Change Length - inserting and deleting bars ............. 10-29 The track Commands Bank ............................................ ..................... 10-31 Determination of the editing area - Track-range function .... 10-31 Event Edit Track ............................................. ............................ 10 - 32 Copy Track ............................................... ................................... 10-36 Erase Track ............................................... .................................. 10-37 Merge Track ............................................... ................................. 10-37 Transpose Track ............................................... ........................... 10-38 Shift Track ............................................... .................................... 10-39 Table of Contents - 6

Page 9 Contents

KS-32 user guide Scale Track ............................................... .................................. 10-40 Filter Events ............................................... ................................ 10-41 Quantize-Track.....................................................................................10 - 42 Track Mute status ............................................. ................................... 10-43

Part 11 - Storage Memory card storage ............................................. ....................... 11-1 Insert the battery in a RAM card .................................... 11-1 Memory card configurations ............................................. .... 11-2 Formatting an empty card .............................................. ........ 11-2 Save sounds on memory card ..................................... 11-3 Informational and error messages ............................................ 11 - 4 Storing sequence data on memory card ..................... 11-5 About the sequencer memory ............................................. .......... 11-5 Informational and error messages ............................................ 11 - 6 MIDI SYS-EX-storage ........................................... ....................... 11-7 Sending MIDI Sys Ex data from the KS-32 .............................. 11-7 Send one or several sounds via MIDI Sys-Ex ................ 11-7 Send sequences / songs via MIDI Sys-Ex ......................... 11-8 Receive MIDI SysEx data ......................................... ...... 11-9

Part 12 - Examples of application Using the KS-32 with drum machines ......................................... ..... 12-1 Song Position Pointer ............................................. ............................... 12-2 MIDI Song Select ............................................. ..................................... 12-2 The KS-32 and MIDI guitar controller ........................................ ..... 12-3 Creating your own drum kits ............................................ ............. 12-4 Editing Voices ............................................... ...................... 12-5 Setting the keys scope ............................................... ........ 12-6 Save the edited drum kits ......................................... 12-7 Creating a Sequence / a preset for external MIDI sound sources .12 - 8 MIDI connectors ............................................... ........................... 12-8 Selection of Multi-mode ............................................. ............ 12-8 MIDI mode and channel - receiving instruments ...................... 12-9 MIDI track configuration .............................................. ............. 12-9

Appendix - KS-32 MIDI implementation Parameters - Reference lists

Table of Contents - 7

Page 11 10 KS-32 user guide

Initiation

Initiation Willkommen!............................................................................................i - 1 The synthesizer ................................................ ........................................ i - 1 The sequencer ................................................ .......................................... i - 2 MIDI master keyboard ............................................... ............................... i - 2 Storage ................................................. .............................................i - 2 The instruction manual ............................................... . ......................... i - 3 Power Ups ................................................ . .............................................. i - 3 Power supply - grounding .............................................. . ....................... i - 3 Voltage conditions ................................................ . ............................ i - 3 Chill Guidelines ................................................ ............................. i - 4 The KS-32 in a hi-fi system ........................................ . ..................... i - 5 Turning the KS-32 in a MIDI connection ..................................... i - 5 Low Battery Voltage - When the battery BE REPLACED WITH ..... i - 5 Re-initialization of the KS-32 .......................................... . ......................... i - 6 When re-initialized shoulderstand be ............................................ ............... i - 6

Welcome! Congratulations and thank you for choosing the ENSONIQ KS-32 havebeen DECIDED. The KS-32 Keyboard Combines a great sounding synthesizer with a fantastic recordable Weighted Keyboard, making it Both as a synthesizer, as well as Master keyboard is Suitable. The KS-32 has a channel aftertouch, 24-bit FX processor, a powerful 16-track sequencer with Mixdown functions and 32 voices. With 32 votes Increases Maximum number of simultaneous notes, dass die flexibility in Layers of sounds and preset creation Increases, chord voicings Allows improved and much more detail in the sequencer. All this taken together constitutes the ENSONIQ KS-32 Weighted Action MIDI Studio.

The synthesizer The synthesizer section of the KS-32 contains 180 great sounds, 100 Sounds in ROM (Read Only Memory) with 80 additional memories in the internal RAM (Random Access Memory). The 80 RAM locations (The internal memory) can thus be used to sounds from various RAM or ROM cards together, each 160 can save more sounds and the number of playable Simultaneously Increase sounds to an impressive 340th Each KS-32 sound besteht of three independent voices (voices) with 168 sampled acoustic and synthetic waveforms, Including ENSONIQ s unique Trans Waves â&#x201E;˘, to immense harmonious diversity and dynamics allow.

i-1

Page 12 Initiation

KS-32 user guide The amendment did to broad palette of tone colors is a built-in digital multi-effects device did each KS-32 sound spatial width and

Density adds. Different reverb, chorus, flanging, delay, Distortion and even Roto-speaker programs are dynamic overmany Influenced parameter.

The Sequencer The 16 track sequencer Combines ease of programming with extensive editing capabilities gene rally only place in Software can be found sequencers. Up to 8,500 notes be recorded (expandable to 58,000 notes with the additional SQX 70 extension) at a resolution of 96 beats per quarter Note for precise timing. It stores up to 70 sequences complementary to 30 Songs can be connected. Are, after recording tracks Post-processing functions: such as quantization, time shift and Single-step editing available with your music in Which a Can make way did you would have thought in this kind of impossible. And always with the option of each work and change with the to compare the old version before you choose the better option decide. The Auto Punch function Allows accurate setting Points for once out and out, just like in professional Recording studios. Each track in the sequencer can OPTIONALLY internal sounds of the KS-32 and / or trigger sounds from external audio sources, each with its own MIDI channel, program number, MIDI Status and adjustable volume.

MIDI master keyboard The track sequencer buttons so enable the combination of up to 16 internal or external (MIDI) sounds so did you own Can create sound Combinations or splits, what the performance Options greatly Increased. This can track Combinations be saved as presets performance and Quickly retrieve. Through the Data heads of the sequences did containment eight internal / external sounds hold, you can save 70 presets performance. There are so another 30 special song data heads with Which even 16 internal / external Can save MIDI tracks, giving a total of 100 presets. With this feature, the KS-32 Keyboard as a master keyboard for a complete MIDI system can be used. The KS-32 even has a Which special key with default presets (presets pattern) create blank, In Which then Layers and Splits are already ready prepared.

i-2

Page 13 KS-32 user guide

Initiation

Storage The KS-32 uses memory cards in credit card format to store of a sounds and sequences. Sounds and sequence data can So has MIDI system exclusive data to any MIDI device are trans mitted, Which is Suitable for storage of data examined.

The instruction manual This guide is your key to understanding the full capabilities the KS-32. At this point, They Are Perhaps a little unsure of what As for the handling of your new instrument. The rest of this part a brief description of the most important security and Assembly Measures. Then follows part 1 tutorial , quick startup (building, Connecting and shut-down) for the ENSONIQ KS-32. If you tried all the sounds and on impression of the bandwidth got this synthesizer, and are willing to go into the matter enter, take the time to the rest of the instructions with the

Share on sound programming, sequencing and storage practices to read. You will receive valuable support and tips. Your learning process the new KS-32 will greatly accelerated and facilitated. Again, Thank you and have fun with the new KS-32. Enjoy the music!

i-3

Page 14 Initiation

KS-32 user guide

Power Ups Plug the power cord into the socket provided on the Back of the KS-32, next to the power switch. The other end belongs to a grounded wall outlet (the correct voltage is at Label with the serial number on the back). Switch the KS 32, making the display lights up surethat. If not, recheck all connections.

Power supply - grounding Like many modern electronic devices, Including your KS-32 has a three-wire To Ensure power cord with a grounding for safe operation. There are other products using only two-wire power cords did not do Have grounding. Make sure all your devices with grounded did Power cables are fitted. This extension cords and thus Applies to Distribution boxes. Ideally you connect all devices of your system the same circuit on. This way, you avoid ground loops.

Voltage conditions Like any computer stops responding and the KS-32 sensitive to voltage acute and waste. Lightning strikes, power outages or surges in Network can disrupt your internal memory and in some Cases May even damage the hardware. Here are a few tips on how to can protect Themselves from seeking events: • A Überspannunsschutz: This inexpensive solution Prevents Surges in general. There are so distribution with built-in Surge protection, Which are slightly more expensive than Conventional manifold. A reasonable purchase, then! • A power stabilizer. This is the best, albeit expensive solution for Voltage problems. In addition to protection against overvoltage Ensures a network stabilizer so well protected from Voltage dips. If the KS-32, oft under difficult Operate current conditions, you shoulderstand purchase essential in

Draw consideration.

Chill Guidelines Inside the KS-32 are Numerous computerized, electronic circuits with strong temperature fluctuations Could be damaged. If the KS-32 after a long stay in extreme cold is returned in a heated room, forms in the Device moisture by condensation (as a glasses fog). Shall the device turned on, it can cause short circuits. Extreme high temparatures impacting Both circuits as well as the housing. On this background, you shoulderstand follow thesis guidelines strictly note:

i-4

Page 15 KS-32 user guide

Initiation • Let the KS-32 a long time without temparatures below 10 ° C or about 38 ° C. • When using the KS-32 after traveling back in enclosed spaces bring the device can be at least about 20 minutes to To achieve Raumtemparatur. In extreme Außentemparaturen (under 10 ° C or above 38 ° C) wait at least one hour before the Switch on the device. • Set the KS-32 is not direct sunlight in a vehicle ment from.

The KS-32 on a hi-fi system If you want to operate your KS-32 on your stereo, caution is Commanded. A stereo system is good for playing CDs, Records or cassettes Suitable - the dynamic range of synthesis media is limited and your speakers are not strong Refer to Exposed level or frequency hopping. But if the dynamic range is a CD higher than that of a record, so a CD is even more harmless Compared to the uncompressed unlimited Output power of a professional keyboards. Search Keyboards can damage your speakers as well. If your KS-32 so be sure to want to run on the stereo system, go Your boxes to love only small volumes.

Turning the KS-32 in a MIDI connection Just as the individual components of a system always before Power stage, you shoulderstand sending in the MIDI connection Switch on the device always before receiving devices. This will avoid unwanted MIDI information when switching from some Sent devices. This can lead to conflict or crashes. If did sometimes happens, turn the receiving device just yet off and then on again.

Low Battery Voltage - When the battery BE REPLACED The reason why the KS-32's sounds and sequences not forget even if it is turned off, is the factthat its internal RAM "Battery backup" is. The battery is located inside the device and only to authorized by ENSONIQ Exchanged -Vertragswerkstatt be. The battery in the KS-32 has a life span of about five Years. You want to know When The time comes, the KS-32: because you telling time. One day you will turn your instrument, and instead of the usual message saying the Following wants to Appear: WARNING! Battery low see manual.

i-5

Page 16 Initiation

KS-32 user guide Then press a button to the normal operating mode come. Then make surethat all your sounds and sequences are secured (memory card or MIDI Sys-Ex) and contact with Your ENSONIQ dealers in connection to the battery as soon as can be substituiertem possible. Important: If you receive a "Battery Low" message after a RAM card which Introduced, this report Refers to the battery , the RAM card, not the instrument Itself in See part 11 Storage , as the card is Replaced battery.

Re-initialization of the KS-32 The flexibility and performance of the KS-32 lies in the fact, did he really is a computer-a computer shaped like a key instrument, but of despite everything a computer. If you ever have a Have been working computer, you shoulderstand load the operating system and the Reinitialize after an error message already be familiar with. The reinitialize the KS-32 corresponds to the re-boot a computer. There are several factors to consider When KS-32 (as with any computer) crash the operating system can lead - voltage transients diseases, loss of power, charges etc. As with any computer, can rare, misleading or illogical sequences of commands Commands confuse the software and illogical results sen lead. It looks like as if Causing damage, while there are oft only invalid data, the internal memory (RAM) Jumble have brought`. Sometimes there already helps a one off and on again Power Ups. If did does not help, the device May have to re-initialize be.

When re-initialized Should be: If the KS-32 Itself Behaves Strangely, the display illogical View or outputs "Unexpected Events" messages Appear in the Sequezer and unforeseen things happen in the edit area, try to re-initialize only once before the Service Department endeavor.

Warning :

If your KS-32 re-initialize, all internal sounds and Sequences / presets lost. (The 80 manufacturing RAM sounds become more Automatically loaded into the internal memory.) THEREFORE, A Certain Care in the field of data protection to your habit. Save They all important data to a memory card or via MIDI Sys-Ex before the KS-32 re-initialize.

i-6

Page 17 KS-32 user guide

Initiation To the KS-32 to re-initialize: • Press the Edit Seq / Presets button. The LED lights up. • While the store Seq button ( Bank 9 ) , press and hold press the Screen 9 button. • The display shows: "Re-initialize sound & seq RAM?" • Press the Up button. The Up button thus functions as a Yes button to To answer questions from the display (the Down button Applies accordingly Speaking as No ).

If the trouble persists after re-initialize silent not resolved, You Should contact your ENSONIQ dealer, or the ENSONIQ Customer service.

i-7

Page 19 18 KS-32 user guide

Part - 1 Tutorial

Part 1 - Tutorial This part of the manual is to help to plug in, switch and Try the ENSONIQ thought KS-32 keyboard. In this tutorial we will focus on the most important applications of the KS-32, to familiarize you with some of the most important components and features. Nevertheless, please read Part 2 - Overview and the rest of the operator ating instructions for getting all cooperation as described in this section hang and features really understand completely. AnschluĂ&#x;...................................................................................................1 - 1 Power Ups ................................................ . .............................................. 1-2 To select a program .............................................. . ................................ 1-2 Sound storage areas ............................................... . ........................... 1-3 Select a basic sound editing on ........................... 1-6 Select a voice for editing on ........................................ 1-6 Selecting a waveform ............................................... .......... 1-6 Selects ............................................... effects. ................................ 1-7 Save a new sound .............................................. ................... 1-8 Discard changes in sound .............................................. .. ............... 1-9 Get Out ................................................ . ............................................... 1 9 Copy of a sound at a different location ....................... 1 - 10 Sequencer basics ................................................ ........................... 1 - 10 Record Other Tracks ............................................... ...................... 1-13 Reworking of tracks ............................................... ..................:: 1 - 14 Master MIDI controller functions ............................................ .. ....... 1 - 15

The pattern presets ............................................... ..................................: 1 - 16 Create splits and layers .............................................. ................: 1 - 16

Connection The Following figure shows how this is to be wired KS-32: Amplifier

Blender

Plz Follow Me

Audio Outputs

Network switch

Headers listener

1-1

Page 20 Part 1 - Tutorial

KS-32 user guide

Reinforcement Connect the audio outputs of the KS-32 with the line inputs a mixer or instrument amplifier. To do this, the usual 6.3 mm jack cable. When connecting in stereo, you shoulderstand panoramic regulator of the two mixer channels each way to the right and left turn to take full advantage of the stereo effects of the KS-32. If the KS-32 only want to use Mono, take either the left or the right output. The other output must then remain free. Thereby switches the KS-32 automatically to mono operation. It is recommended that the Off Plug the cable, the system or the volume to 0 to rotate so that speakers and other components are protected.

Warning :

The outputs of the KS-32 have line level and should only line Inputs such as mixers, stereo preamplifier. Keyboard amp, etc. be connected. The connection of the outputs of the KS-32 with a Mic-level input, such as a guitar amp or mic inputs a tape deck is not recommended. These devices may be damaged be.

Warning :

The headphone output is optimized for headphones with a medium level or high impedance (50-600 ohms). If you headphones with lower Use impedance (8 ohms "Walkman" headphones), turn the Volume control back, because the high output level could your Ears hurt.

Power Ups Turn on your system in the following order: 1) KS-32 (power switch is right on the back). 2) Mixer 3) Amplifier Ask. The amp volume to normal room volume If you hear nothing, switch the MIDI system (in the reverse Order) and check all connections.

Selecting a Sound To select a KS-32 Sound: â&#x20AC;˘ Press Select sound . The KS-32 This change in the Select Sound Mode Select Sound and LED lights. If you once Select Sound are fashion, you need to select sound - not even button

press once to select other sounds. Illuminates the Select Sound LED, the ten narrow to bank and the ten larger screen buttons (0 to 9) used in each case a sound call, which can then be played.

1-2

Page 21 KS-32 user guide

Part - 1 Tutorial

MuteEffects SeqTrack Quantize Store Tracks Control ClickSong Cmds Cmds Cmds Track Seqs Locate Store Sounds Effects Wave PitchEnv1LFOFilterEnv2AmpOutput Drums Drums Bank buttons A Card Card B Bank Set buttonBankSetBank ROM Select 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Select Sound button Screen keys Screen KeyTransChannel MIDIPressure Sustain Volume BusRange pose Program Status Grade Pedal PanOutput Timbre Release • Press the Bank 0 button and then Screen 0 . You have the sound # 00 is selected. • Press the Bank 8 button and then screen 5 . The sound is # 85th Try to select different sounds and play.

Note :

You can also use the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons to use to carry to switch the sounds. The cursor buttons to scroll through the sounds of the each memory area (eg. B. Internal Sounds) and then change in the separate drum kits.

Sound storage areas Each KS-32 Sound is a complex structure of up to three single Voices (voices) for each key, and a programmable effect. They can be selected with the KS-32 up to 340 sounds simultaneously: • Internal (INT) - The 80 sounds in the internal memory of the KS-32 (RAM or random-access memory). The Internal (INT) sounds can both standard sounds and drum sounds (see Part 6 and 7 for details). • ROM - 80 More sounds permanently stored in ROM (Read Only Memory) are stored. As the Internal (INT) sounds are also I saved ROM sounds in the KS-32, but in contrast to the INT Sounds can not be changed or deleted. • CARD A and B - 160 additional sounds can be stored on a card (80 sounds in group A and 80 in group B sounds) contained in the Card slot is inserted. As the Internal (INT) group, can also the card-sounds-standard or drum sounds to be. • DRUM MACHINES - The sound banks 8 and 9 contain only drum kits. These drum kits are always available, no matter whether you are in Internal (INT), ROM or CARD-range. The Drum Kits the banks 8 and 9 are permanently stored in ROM and can be neither modify or delete.

Selecting the Internal ROM and audio card BankSet

Internal

ROM

A Card

Card B Bank buttons

1-3

Page 22 Part 1 - Tutorial

KS-32 user guide The first four bank buttons are also used to distinguish between internal,

The first four bank buttons are also used to distinguish between internal, ROM, CARD A and B CARD switch. Always appears in the display Group, location and name of the sound itself: Sound Group ROM

Position 80

Dynamic Grand

Sound Name There are three methods to switch between the different areas of switch:

1) The BankSet and Bank - buttons - You can use any of the sound groups selected directly by the BankSet - Press and hold button and to one of the four first bank - press buttons. The Bank buttons are labeled accordingly.

2) The BankSet key - By repeatedly pressing the BankSet button You can also turn off sound by the individual groups.

3) The left / right cursor keys - As with the BankSet button can one with the left / right cursor keys to scroll through the Sound Groups switch.

1-4

Page 23 KS-32 user guide

Part - 1 Tutorial

Memory Cards (Cards) With memory cards can extend the sound range of the KS-32 and Sounds and sequences store. Before sounds or sequences of can use a card, you must first of ENSONIQ SC or ISC ROM card, or a MC-32 RAM card into the card slot of the KS-32 plug, always with the label side up. Make sure the Card straight and evenly inserted into the slot.

MC - 32 THE TECHNOLOGY THAT PERFORMS

Cards can always be inserted or withdrawn (unless You are saving some), even when the power is turned on without damaging the device. More about attire in Part 11 - storage.

1-5

Page 24 Part 1 - Tutorial

KS-32 user guide

Programming of Sounds With the ENSONIQ KS-32 Keyboard you can easily sound parameters change of the sound to your taste or own, new Make sounds. A full treatment of this topic for in Section 6 - Standard sound programming . We want to here few simple edits deal:

Select a basic sound editing: • Choose a drum sound (for our example bank 8 and screen 0 ). The display shows: Drum 80 Big Ol 'Rock Kit

• Before you can edit a sound, you must first KS-32 in bring the sound edit mode. So press the Edit Sound . The parameters in the Sound Edit mode are ten banks distributed. Each bank contains a series of screens on which then one or more Are parameters. • Press Wave ( Bank 0 key) and 5 screen is displayed.: Press ENTER to Change Sound Mode

• Press Enter • Save . You now have a basic sound editing

generated. The display shows the message "Command Successful!"

Select a Voice for editing: Each sound of the KS-32 can consist of up to three separate voices (votes) exist. We want to edit the first voice: • Press the right cursor is the second voice (it button selected if it flashes). • Use the down cursor turn off the voice to OFF. • Press the right cursor key to select the third Voice. • Use the down cursor turn off the voice to OFF.

1-6

Page 25 KS-32 user guide

Part - 1 Tutorial • Now use the left cursor button again to the first voice. The display should look like this: Select Voice: ONE ON OFF OFF

flashes

Selecting a waveform: • Press Wave ( bank 0) and 1 screen appears in the display.: Wave = STRING WAVE STRING ENSEMBLE flashes • Select STRING ENSEMBLE on. If the name is not flashing, use the cursor keys or press Screen 1 a second time, to select the waveform. • Use the Up • Yes and No Down • cursor keys, you can now each of the 168 internal waveforms select. With the data entry control You can reach here only the waveforms of a waveform class. Wave = STRING WAVE

Waveform Class

STRING ENSEMBLE Single shaft If you repeat the above steps, you can each of the assign three votes own waveform and this superimpose by placing the voices to ON. There are many other sound parameters that can be edited in a similar manner can. All Sound Edit parameters are in Section 6 - Standard Sound Programming described.

Selects effects The effects in the KS-32 are extensively edited. There are numerous Effect parameters for each effect type. In this section we want only deal with the selection of raw produce effects. More on effects and parameters, see Part 4 - Effects . Here we go! • Press Select Sound and select ROM # 00 on. If the Display no ROM sounds appear, press the BankSet

1-7

Page 26 Part 1 - Tutorial

KS-32 user guide Button until the display appears ROM. Then press Bank 0 and Screen 0 . • Press the Edit sound , followed by the Effect button ( Bank 8 ) around the 00 To see the accompanying sound effect of #. • Move the left / right cursor to the effect name (if this not already flashing). • Now you can use the up / down cursor keys to select new effects. Every time an effect has been selected, you can use the different screen buttons each effect parameter to the Select each effect type.

Save a new sound If you programmed a new sound or a current sound have been modified to your taste, it must be stored, so that it is accessible even later. Last edited or sounds can be secured to each of the 80 internal RAM locations. This is as follows:

1) Make sure that the Edit Sound LED flashes, and here see: Flashing SeqTrack Quantize MuteEffects Store Locate Control ClickSong Cmds Cmds Cmds Track Tracks Seqs Store Wave PitchEnv1LFOFilterEnv2AmpOutput Effects Sounds Sound Card B Drums Drums BankSet Internal ROM A Card Bank Select 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Screen Sound Volume KeyTransChannel MIDIPressure Sustain PanOutput BusRange pose Program Status Grade Pedal Timbre Release

Edit

If not, press the Compare button. The flashing Edit Sound LED indicates that the sound you hear is in the edit buffer.

2) Press the Enter • Save button. This will take you to the "Write Mode ", which is said the KS-32 that you are done editing and are now ready to save the sound. The display shows: Save SOUND Default Prog # 00

flashes

1-8

Page 27 KS-32 user guide

Part - 1 Tutorial 3) Enter the data entry buttons to select a maximum 16-digit name for your new sound on. Use the left / right cursor switch the sites with the Data Entry knob and the up / down cursor Buttons to enter letters or characters. If the DataEntry knob slide all the way down, you get a space. You will notice that names with dashes, dots, or Slashes between the words look better if the sound

later appears in the display.

4) If you have entered a name, press again the Enter • Save button.

5) Use the first eight bank and screen buttons a Memory location (you know: The banks 8 and 9 are for the drum Kits reserved). These buttons will show on the display, which Sounds there are still at the moment. With the BankSet button switch between INT and CARD A and B. Move to a Space whose sound you no longer need. The sounds in the Memory can thereby be even bugged by the Compare key between the sound in memory and your new Sound toggle.

6) If a suitable location is found, press Enter • Save a more time. The display briefly shows "SAVED" appears before the current Parameter appears again.

Discard changes in sound If you find that you are not using your modifications of a sound are satisfied and dear once more with the original sound all by want to start again. Press Compare , so that the edit sound light remains on. They can then start again with the original sound. There However, you will lose any edits you have made previously.

Get Out From the Edit Pages You can always "get off" from the editing process if you have decided to no longer continue working on that sound. Simply press the Select sound . To return to the Select sound mode and can move on from there.

From the Write Mode If you are currently in write mode, you can at any time "Off" (assuming you have not already for the third time Enter • Save key) if you do not save more

1 - 9 to

Page 28 Part 1 - Tutorial

KS-32 user guide want. To do this press the Edit Sound button, followed by the Select Sound button. To return to the Select Sound and Fashion can continue from there.

Copy of a sound at a different location Sometimes you may want to take an existing sound, a you have not changed, and this simply elsewhere store. For example, if the ten most important sounds to be want to combine a bank. • Select the sound you want to copy to. • Press Enter • Save . The display shows "Replace Edit Sound?" • Press the Up • Yes cursor button. The selected sound is now in the edit buffer. From there, you can now proceed exactly as previously described in the "Save" section.

Sequencer Basics The KS-32 has a 16-track sequencer with full Mixdown automation. You can import live both in real time or enter difficult passages Step-By-Step. An Car Locator function as well as editing free areas allows you to specifically to at certain measures, beats, or even individual notes work. With a large selection of editaton functions you can

Edit parts or experiment completely free - you can even learn new Compare ideas with the old original versions before you decide what is to be saved. In this part it is only once the basic outlines of the KS-32 Sequencer. For more information, please refer to Part 8, 9 and 10 this manual.

To create a new sequence • Press the Select Seq / Preset - in the Sequence / Preset button to To get fashion. • The Bank and screen buttons to select an available disk space (bank 0-6). Remember: Banks 0 to 6 contain sequences the benches 7 to 9 Songs. The following display appears: PRESET ## Loc = ## * Empty Seq / Pset *

1 - 10

Page 29 KS-32 user guide

Part - 1 Tutorial • Press the Enter • Save button. The display shows: New Sequence Location = ##

With the Data Entry knob or the Up / Down cursor - keys to now cycle through all the available memory capacity (appear in a song the blank song presets). • If you have a suitable location is found, press the right cursor or the Enter • Save button. The display shows: Time Signature = 4.4

Use the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons you can now different Enter clock counts. The right cursor or the Enter • Save button move ahead to the next value. Press the right cursor or the Enter • Save button again and the display shows: New name = Sequence ##

You can now return to the Data Entry knob or the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons to select the various letters, numbers, Enter and characters for a name and with the left / right cursor Buttons to select the desired location. • Now that you have space, time signature and name for the sequence have been entered, press yet Enter • Save and the display "Command Successful!"

Selection of sounds to use

Before we can start recording, we must still decide what sounds like we work. For this example, We take a few sounds that are well suited for a rock sequence. Feel free to try sometimes other sounds and arrangements made.

1-11

Page 30 Part 1 - Tutorial

KS-32 user guide And here we go: • Press the Track 1 button. • Press the Replace-track sound button. The first track in this Sequence is to be played with the sound "Big Ol 'Drum Kit". • Press Bank 8 and Screen 0 The display should look like this.: Trk01 DRUM 80 Big Ol 'Rock Kit

• Press the Replace-track sound again key to the To leave Replace track sound mode.

Low Track 1 Before we start shooting, you should first of all with the Make sound familiar. Experiment with different patterns. For our Rock sequence, you play best with your left hand bass drum (C2) to the first and third beat and the snare (C3) to the second and fourth beat. With the right hand playing the hi-hat (E3 and F3) to 8th notes. If you have practiced this pattern, you can take:

1) Keep Record and press to play. Play the Pattern about 8 bars.

2) Press Stop • Continue . The display will then: Keep Trk01 first 008 bars?

3) Now press either up • Yes or Enter • Save to the first track to keep (KEEP NEW TRACK). Press the Play button to You listen to the recording. If you are not recording are satisfied, press the Down • No button and simply begin again in front of.

Low Track 2 • Press the Track 2 button. • Press the Replace-track sound button. For the second track of this Sequence, we use the rock bass.

1 - 12 out

Page 31

KS-32 user guide

Part - 1 Tutorial • Press the BankSet button until the RAM Sound group appears. Then press bank 1 and 2 screen . The display should look like this: Trk02 RAM 12 Rockbass

• Press the Replace-Track Sound - button again to replace the To leave track sound mode. Before recording the second track, you can go to the already practice drum pattern recorded by the Play button. If you are ready to record, press the Stop • Continue button and then: • Press Record and Play . You will hear a bar count and then begin to play. If the track is recorded, changes the sequencer automatically in playback and plays what you have just taken, and the display: Press ENTER to KEEP NEW TRACK

• Press Enter • Save to keep the newly recorded track. If you do not like the new track or listen to the original want, press the Down • No cursor button. The display shows then: Press ENTER to KEEP OLD TRACK

• You should now be able to hear only the drum track. If you now enter • Save Press the newly recorded bass track will be deleted. Want Keep the bass track, however, press the Up • Yes cursor button and then enter • Save .

Record Other Tracks If you follow the steps in uptake of trace 2 repeat (top), You can select other sounds, and the remaining six tracks the sequence record. Are the tracks once recorded, you can Edit and modify images far-reaching.

1-13

Page 32 Part 1 - Tutorial

KS-32 user guide Remember: If sequences are combined into a song, incur further eight tracks, giving a total of sixteen tracks results. Read the parts 8,9 and 10 for further information about Sequences.

Reworking of tracks You've just created a separate sequence, but what happens when the Drums are not exactly in time? The KS-32 can each track after recording quantize and listen to the result before the Changes will be stored. This is just one of the many Post-processing functions of the KS-32 keyboard. And so quantize Lay down a drum track:

Quantization of a track:

• Select the drum track. In our rock sequence, we have the "Big Ol 'Rock Kit" on 1 track. • Press the Edit Seq / preset . • Select the Quantize Track (Bank 6) to. The screen looks as follows: SEQ £ 00 STOP Quantize Track

• Press Enter • Save . The display shows: Track = 1 Sequence ##

With this screen, you can select the track and the sequence you To quantize. Since this is already the correct sequence and track, • Press again Enter • Save . Now ask the sequencer after Note value for the quantization. • Use the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons to change the resolution. In this case we try it with quarter notes. • Press Enter • Save . Now we are prompted again Enter • Save to press to quantize the entire track. • Press Se Enter • Save DO ENTIRE TRACK. • Press play and listen to the new version. You will be find that bass drum and snare are right, the eighth-HiHat Figure however, has been quantized to quarter notes. That is not, what we wanted, so. , ,

: 1 - 14

Page 33 KS-32 user guide

Part - 1 Tutorial • Press the Down • No cursor button. The display shows: Press ENTER to KEEP OLD TRACK

• Press Enter • Save the old version (unquantized) retain (KEEP OLD TRACK). So we quantize the track again, but this time with a higher resolution. • Press Quantize Track (Bank 6) . • Press Enter • Save . The display shows: Track = 1 Sequence ##

We are still in the correct sequence and the right track, that's why • Press again Enter • Save . The display we queried the resolution. • Use the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons on the resolution Eighth notes. • Press Enter • Save . On the next screen, after again Enter • Save asked to quantize the entire track. • Press Enter • Save DO ENTIRE TRACK. • When you play press, you can hear the re-quantized track. You will notice that the Hi-Hat figure now on eighth-notes is quantized. So it should be, therefore, • Press Enter • Save to save this version (KEEP NEW TRACK).

There are many other post-processing functions that a Track can be modified; they are in the parts 9 and 10 detail described.

Master MIDI controller functions The KS-32 from the factory with 30 internal "Performance Presets" delivered, on the banks of 0 to 2 can be found. These presets are intended to split and layer capabilities of the KS-32 demonstrate, as well as to show the work with MIDI sound sources. Also if we do not know with what kind of MIDI sound sources you work, Performance Presets can be a valuable aid to understanding the KS-32 be as MIDI master keyboard.

Note :

This performance presets are not saved in the internal ROM area. So if you want your KS-32 must re-initialize be

1 - 15

Page 34 Part 1 - Tutorial

KS-32 user guide go these patterns are lost. If you want to save the pattern presets, We recommend either a RAM card or the storage via MIDI SysEx as in part 11 - Storage described.

The pattern presets: The 30 internal pattern presets follow the guidelines by the makeDefault preset button can be specified. That is, in the upper row are internal sounds in the lower row MIDI sounds. Both internal, as well as MIDI sounds can be used for splits or layers (strata) be used. 1 2 3 4 Local Local Local LocalLayer LowerUpper Split Split 5 6 7 8 MIDI MIDI MIDI MIDI LayerLowerUpper Split Split

Create splits and layers The KS-32, you can create your own keyboard splits, or internal and MIDI sounds be layered (doubled). This controller features could be considered as Presets are saved and are then available on call. The default Preset template is used as the default template for MIDI master keyboard Applications. This makes it possible, in a simple sound To start sound mode, then additional touch of a button to be layered internal / external sounds or splitting. Let us once a Performance Preset select: • Press the Select Sounds button and then select another Sound on which you want to combine with the first one. Then select back to the first sound, so that these can be seen on the display. • Now press the Make-default preset button. Your preset is now automatically as Default preset template created. • The sound that was selected in the Sound just fashion, as the makeDefault preset had pressed button is now in lanes 1, 3, 4, 5, 7 been copied and 8. Its effect settings are automatically the ESP loaded. • The penultimate sound that you had been selected in the sound mode is in lanes 2 and 6. This gives you instant access to these sound for the layer. • All MIDI channels of the tracks are eigestellt on the base channel you under System • MIDI, Screen 4 can set. • Tracks 1-4 have MIDI Status = LOCAL. • Tracks 5-8 have MIDI Status = MIDI. • Is under System • MIDI, Screen 4 as status = LOCAL, appears Default preset with track. 1

: 1 - 16

Page 35 KS-32 user guide

Part - 1 Tutorial • Is under System • MIDI, Screen 4 as status = BOTH, appears Default preset layered together with Track 1 and 5. • Is under System • MIDI, Screen 4 as status = MIDI or * EXT * the default preset appears only track. 5 • The tracks 3 and 7 have as KeyRange preset A0 - B3. Thus, for you instantly call up keyboard splits for the lower half of the keyboard, both internally via MIDI. • The Tracks 4 and 8 have as KeyRange preset C4 - C8. Thus, for you instantly call up keyboard splits for the upper half of the keyboard - even again internally and via MIDI. • The name of the new preset is first "Sequence ##", where ## of the Memory number corresponds with the preset automatically has been saved. This name can be any time in the Edit Seq / Preset Mode under Seq Commands , Screen 4 be amended ("Rename SEQ / Pset"). More about Performance presets and the default preset function Refer to Section 8 - Presets .

: 1 - 17

Page 37 36 KS-32 user guide

Part 2 - Overview

Part 2 - Overview This part is an introduction to the various buttons, controls and Connection jacks on the back of the KS-32, a conceptual

Overview of the entire system, a help for the selection of sounds, Presets and sequences, as well as a discussion of the post-processing of different parameter types. We recommend you this Abscnitt read this carefully - so make the most of your KS-32 Keyboard. Ports on the back .............................................. ..................... 2 - 2 MIDI Thru ............................................... ....................................... 2 - 2 MIDI Out ............................................... ......................................... 2 - 2 MIDI In ............................................... ............................................ 2 - 2 Foot switch input ............................................. .............................. 2 - 2 Memory card slot ............................................. ....................... 2 - 3 Pedal / CV ............................................... .......................................... 2 - 3 Right / Mono output ............................................. ............................ 2 - 3 Left / Mono output ............................................. .............................. 2 - 3 Headphones ................................................. ................................................ 2 - 4 Performance controllers ............................................... ............................. 2-4 The front panel - Communication with the KS-32 ....................... 2-5 The Select Sound button ............................................ ....................... 2 - 6 The edit sound button ............................................ .......................... 2 - 6 The BankSet button .............................................. ............................ 2 - 6 The Bank buttons .............................................. ............................... 2 - 7 The screen buttons .............................................. ............................. 2 - 7 The Select Sequence / Preset button .......................................... ......... 2 - 8 The Edit Sequence / Preset button .......................................... ............ 2 - 8 The Edit track button ............................................ ........................... 2 - 8 The track buttons .............................................. ............................... 2 - 8 The drive buttons .............................................. ........................ 2 - 9 The Replace-track sound button .......................................... ........... 2 - 9 The make-default preset button .......................................... ............ 2 - 9 The System â&#x20AC;˘ MIDI button ............................................ ...................... 2 - 9 The MIDI connections .............................................. .......................... 2-10 Control external MIDI devices - MIDI connectors ......................... 2-10 MIDI mode and channel for MIDI-controlled instruments ...................... 2 - 11 MIDI Track Configuration ............................................. ....................... 2 - 11 Parametric programming ................................................ ............. 2 - 12 Change a parameter ............................................... .................... 2 - 13 About this Guide ............................................... ............................... 2 - 14 KS-32 Accessories .............................................. ......................................... 2-15

2-1

Page 38 Part 2 - Overview

KS-32 user guide

Ports on the back

Memory Card

Thru

MIDI Out

Ft. Sw.

AudioOut Left Right Mono Pedal â&#x20AC;˘ CV

1) MIDI Thru At this MIDI port, all data is passed unchanged, received at the MIDI IN connector. This allows more Devices in a kind of series are concatenated.

2) MIDI Out MIDI output can be sent via the MIDI data to other devices can. The data received at the MIDI IN are not here.

3) MIDI In MIDI input, which can receive the KS-32 MIDI data.

4) footswitch input Connection for footswitch. This connector supports two types of Footswitches: â&#x20AC;˘ The supplied ENSONIQ SW-6 pedal normally functions as Sustain pedal. Other functions can be programmed. â&#x20AC;˘ With the optional double pedal SW-5 with the right pedal Sustain function is retrieved. The left pedal can be carried corresponding parameter in the system database program (Sostenuto, Start / stop the sequencer etc.) See Part 2, System Bank , for further Information.

2-2

Page 39 KS-32 user guide

Part 2 - Overview

If a SW-6 footswitch is connected:

The pedal works as a sustain pedal

If a SW 5 / SW-10 is connected:

The left pedal works as Aux. Footswitch

The right pedal works as Sustain Footswitch

5) memory card slot If you insert a RAM or ROM card into this slot, have You instant access to another 160 sounds, divided into two banks (CARD A and B CARD) and / or sequence data.

6) Pedal / CV Connector for the optional ENSONIQ CVP-1 control voltage pedal. This pedal can except for volume or for many other modulations be used in the KS-32. It can, for. Example, instead of the modulation wheel are used so that the hands remain free to play. Technical Specifications: 6.3 mm stereo jack (tip = Kontrollspan-voltage input, ring = 2k resistance to +12 volts, shell = earth). Scan Rate = 32ms; recommended maximum modulation = 15 Hz. When using an external power source should be a two-wire cable with voltage be used to point to earth to cover.

7) Right / Mono Output Line output for the right stereo channel. If the left output does not is used here is a mono mix signal.

8) Left / Mono output Line output for the left stereo channel. If the right output nothing is connected, there is also a mono signal.

2-3

Page 40 Part 2 - Overview

KS-32 user guide

Pitch Bend Wheel Modulation Wheel

Headphone Bush

Headphone To hear the KS-32 stereo headphones, close your Headphones over this jack. The headphone volume is the volume control on the front-side controlled (note that a Headphones in this jack is not automatically the normal audio Outputs mute).

Warning :

Performance Controller The KS-32 has several real-time performance controllers with which can be modulated and changed the sounds. Two of the most important located to the left of the keyboard: • PITCH BEND WHEEL - This wheel shifts the pitch of a tone up or down. Normally, the wheel Center position, where it has no influence on the sound - moved to the Wheel up or down, the pitch is in a particular Interval shifted, depending on the setting of the global Bend Parameter under System • MIDI, Screen 0th • MODULATION WHEEL - Perhaps the most popular purpose of modulation tionsrads is the generation of vibrato, but it can also be used for entirely different Purposes are used for. Example, to pitch, tone, volume and many other sound components to modulate.

2-4

Page 41 KS-32 user guide

Part 2 - Overview â&#x20AC;˘ CHANNEL aftertouch is a modulator, with a sound in very different ways by subsequent depression of a already depressed key can be affected. Channel Called aftertouch, and Channel Pressure or monophonic aftertouch, affects all pressed keys simultaneously, even when the pressure is applied only to a key. If you, for example, a three note chord attack and one of the three notes with aftertouch modulate still be all three tones modulated.

The front panel - Communication with the KS-32 The user interface of the KS-32 is designed to be quick and easy switch between the different functional areas of the KS-32 and can herwandern, whether now retrieve sounds or sequences want to record. Therefore, the KS-32 is always in one of these seven modes (MODES): 1 - Sound-Select Mode 2 - Sound Edit mode 3 - Sequence / Preset Select Mode 4 - Sequence / Preset Edit mode 5 - Track Edit mode (a sub-mode of the Sequence / Preset Edit Mode) 6 - Replace-track sound mode 7 - System â&#x20AC;˘ MIDI Edit mode You can access these modes over the seven mode keys (if you have selected a mode can be accessed via the bank - and Screen Buttons to select the various parameters of the respective modes). The display and the data input keys are mainly used for Selecting and modifying used. This information can include sounds, parameters, MIDI functions, etc., depending on which button on the front panel is pressed.

2-5

Page 42 Part 2 - Overview

2 Edit Sound Edit Sound BankSet

KS-32 user guide

3 BankSet

4 Bank buttons

8 Edit Track

7 Edit Seq / Preset

Quantize Mute EffectsStore Edit Cmds Seqs Locate ControlClick Song CmdsSeq CmdsTrack TrackTracks Store WavePitch Env1 LFO Filter Env2 Amp OutputEffectsSounds Seq / Preset

InternalROM A Card Card B DrumsDrums Edit Bank Track 3 4 9 0 1 2 5 6 7 8 Lock Select SelectLayer Screen Sound Seq / Preset Volume Key Trans-Channel MIDI Pressure Pan Output GradeSustain PedalTimbre Bus RangeposeProgram Status Release

1 Select Sound

Screen 5 keys

6 Select Seq / Preset

1) Select Sound button Press the Select -Sound key to move to the Select Sounds Mode (LED lights up). Each time you select a new sound want this key to be pressed. Then you can use the BankSet, bank and screen buttons call up the available sounds.

2) The edit sound button Press the Edit -Sound key to move to the sound Edit Mode (LED lights up). Here, the sounds can be modified. All Sound parameters can be of this mode of reach (waveforms Envelopes, etc.) with the Bank and screen keys to go to the individual parameters of the Sound Edit Mode.

3) The key BankSet The BankSet key switches both in the Select Sound mode, as well as in Replace Track Sound Mode to toggle between the different sound groups. By repeatedly pressing the BankSet button appear one after another the different sound groups. If you BankSet key pressed hold, you can use the BI keys 0-4 individual sound groups also selected directly. Pressing the BankSet button simultaneously MIDI Bank Select to Messages and ENSONIQs special bank "Control" -Programmwechsel sent. When storing edited sounds is the BankSet the button Target group (INT / CARD) changed.

2-6

Page 43 KS-32 user guide

Part 2 - Overview

4) The Bank buttons The ten small buttons in the center of the front panel hot banking Keys. Bank buttons are used to certain groups of pameters, commands, sounds or sequences / recall presets. Which Banks can be selected depends on the selected mode. To view the exact function of the Bank to facilitate buttons was a Color code selected in the caption. You will notice that the two rows Minutes of the bank keys are kept in green and pink. Here you can see which banks parameters via the bank select buttons be. Now you look at my two rows printed under the screen Keys. You will find that these in green and pink are labeled. Here you can see which parameters through e-mail the screens Screen - keys can be selected. Are you in the Sound Edit mode (LED), the bank names will be enabled in green. Banks, from the Sequence are selected / preset edit mode from are represented pink (Corresponding LED is lit). The bottom row of screen names in pink (Under the respective screen - keys) from the System â&#x20AC;˘ MIDI mode off selected (again, by the corresponding LED). As you can imagine, are the Sound Select or Sequence / Preset Mode on the bank buttons again only in each case the corresponding Soundbanks selected.

5) The screen buttons The ten major keys directly below the Bank buttons hot Screen Keys. Screen - keys are used in a particular bank

To select specific pages parameters.

Tip :

There is another way to get the various screens, belonging to a bank to look at. Once you have selected a bank , you can repeatedly press the same bank - the key call different screens that bank. In addition, you can always go to one of the first screen of a bank by the corresponding bank - button pressed for about one second. When behind a screen - several parameters are hidden key, can this also by repeatedly pressing the screen button on the Sequentially call. The Screen - buttons have a secondary function: If you hold it longer, the respective first parameter appears this Screens.

2-7

Page 44 Part 2 - Overview

KS-32 user guide

6) Select Sequence / Preset button With the Select-Sequence / Preset button to the right of the screen - keys, leads to the Sequence / Preset Select Mode (LED). After Press this button you can with the Bank and screen buttons Sequences, select and play songs and presets.

7) Edit Sequence / Preset button With the Edit Sequence / Preset button , on the Edit Track reaches button one in the Sequence / Preset Edit mode (LED on). It is always a Trail running. This mode performs tasks such as creating new presets and sequences, tempo setting, click Status etc. With the Bank and Screen buttons are the individual parameters and commands of the Edit Sequence / Preset Mode called. The track buttons determine which Track to be edited.

8) The Edit Track button Pressing the Edit Track button below the edit-Seq / Preset button , the corresponding LED lights up and you can quickly each track Reach parameters. The Edit Sequence / Preset LED is also lit to To remind you that the Edit Track button like a eleventh Bank Button in the Sequence / Preset Edit mode behaves. Behave the track buttons just like in the Sequence / Preset Edit mode. You decide which Track to be edited. Use the left / right cursor keys or by repeatedly pressing the edit track , you can press go through different parameters. The screen buttons can also be used for the direct election of certain parameters, such as from the description inscription can be seen. Pressing any key bank automatically takes you to the Sequence / Preset Edit mode of the KS-32.

9 Track buttons

Replace Sound Track

11 Replace Track Sound button Make Default preset 12 Make Default Preset button

Record Stop Play 10 drive buttons

System â&#x20AC;˘ MIDI

13 System â&#x20AC;˘ MIDI button

Continue

9) The track buttons In the Sequence / Preset Edit mode, the track buttons to select are the eight individual tracks used. Each track is a different sound and a set of Related Performance parameters included. By Double-click on a track button, while another track already is selected, you can multiple tracks together to double (be layered).

If sequences have been linked to a song, the same eight track buttons

2-8

Page 45 KS-32 user guide

Part 2 - Overview also used for selecting the additional song tracks - the results together sixteen tracks.

10) The drive buttons The "drive buttons" are used to start the sequencer to stop or continue running, as well as in the record or overdub To get fashion.

11) Replace-track sound button If the Replace-track sound key, the over the makeDefault preset - key is, its LED and the KS-32 is flashing in the Replace-track sound mode. In this mode, the sounds can in the individual tracks in a sequence of presets to be replaced. About replace a sound along with its effect, hold the REPLACE Track Sound - key and then press one of the track buttons. More on this in Part 8 - Presets.

12) Make-default preset button If you are in the Select Sound mode, you can use the make-default Preset button the current sound automatically together with its effect in the Preset copy buffer memory. In addition, predefined track Retrieve settings for each track, which is a "Default Template" (Template) results. This template is used as a base for MIDI Master Keyboard applications. If you are in Sequence / Preset Mode, pressing the Make-default preset - button a copy of the track parameter settings made, so then under a new name to the other this preset Can save point.

13) System • MIDI button About the System • MIDI button you can reach all the global system and MIDI parameters. The System • MIDI LED lights. The KS-32 remains in current mode (sound mode or Sequence / Preset mode). By repeatedly pressing the System • MIDI key or the Left / right cursor keys to browse through the various System • MIDI switch parameter. The screen buttons call parameters directly. The names of the parameters are shown in pink below the screen Keys listed. You leave through the System • MIDI Edit mode Press another mode or track button.

2-9

Page 46 Part 2 - Overview The MIDI connections

KS-32 user guide

Musical Instrument Digital Interface - the magical connection with the a keyboard (or a whole cottage fully) played by another of can be. MIDI is a standard to which agreed by the manufacturer have. Musical parameters are converted into digital information transformed, transmitted and received MIDI Instruments can. When they play, for example, a C 3 on the KS-32, is the MIDI Out sends a combination of numbers that press a key represents, together with the number keys and the dynamics. Let You release the button, sends the KS-32, a message, the the sound cancels. Understands a connected MIDI instrument this information and then plays itself this C 3. The same happens if they change a controller, eg. as the modulation wheel, or if a new sound is called - each of these events is indicated in figures transforms, which are then transmitted via the MIDI Out.

Control external MIDI devices - MIDI connectors You can use the sequences / presets of the KS-32 to external MIDI Control devices, which multiply the number of available sounds can. A sequencer, or preset song track can with MIDI Status be used to control external MIDI only by, or in the LOCAL Playing status exclusively internal KS-32 sounds; or BOTH do both at the same time. In this setup, each device uses only its MIDI data, while the are other simply forwarded. In addition, each unit of its own keyboard are played out, and the KS-32 without the to influence others, for the THRU jacks only incoming Further data is transmitted but not the self-generated.

external MIDI Device # 2 MIDI In MIDI Thru

external MIDI Device # 3

MIDI Thru

MIDI In

MIDI Thru

MIDI In

external MIDI Device # 1

to another MIDI Instruments MIDI Out

KS-32

2-10

Page 47 KS-32 user guide

Part 2 - Overview With this setup, you can drive right from the KS-32 off all devices. Simply by dialing the track, the same MIDI channel has as the concerned MIDI instrument. You can then: Play 1) This instrument from the keyboard of the KS-32 from; 2) A track record, then the question of the instrument is played. 3) The receiving MIDI device program change messages send, and the volume control (assuming it processes Controller 7) In other words, once you have the correct MIDI connections and Programming found, the KS-32, a complete MIDI system control as a master keyboard and sequencer.

MIDI mode and channel for MIDI-controlled instruments The next step is, each driven instrument, each expander be set so that it only receives the information intended for him. Does every another broadcast channel (or multi-mode multiple)

They can all be controlled by the KS-32. For each external tool: • Set POLY (OMNI OFF) or MULTI mode. Each instrument must be in a mode where it only on selected MIDI channels receives. This is the POLY mode for one or the MULTI mode for multiple channels. You should research the question Manuals on the device. • Select a MIDI channel (or more). Best of all, each device its channel (s) to assign, and to have them always eingstellt Then you always know what channel a track must have a to control particular instrument. If you are using the sequencer, You can always be sure that the correct instrument the right Track is playing. Have you made this channel settings once you write everything to, and use this table as a reference for each new preset, for each new sequence.

MIDI Track Configuration Once you have made all these settings and your instrument as wired described above, you can now right track in a Sequence or a preset together. For each track, that an external MIDI instrument is intended to drive, select The MIDI status, the corresponding MIDI channel and

2 - 11

Page 48 Part 2 - Overview

KS-32 user guide an appropriate program number. These parameters are in Part 8 Presets described in detail. Note: The KS-32 transmits release velocity (which is the Speed can be released with the key). Some more recent Keyboards process these messages, thus enabling even finer Articulation of sounds. The internal sounds of the KS-32 process, however, No release velocity.

Parametric Programming 32 Character LCD Display Compare Yes No

Enter • Save

Volume Data Entry The method used to edit the sounds, presets and system parameters, is called screen-oriented, parametric programming . The sounds more powerful, but is not so bad. If you have some basic Understand things, you will find that the operation of the KS-32 is fairly simple, despite the many parameters. You may already something of parametric programming have met with other synthesizers. It means nothing, as it is no longer a separate controller or switch for each function are but a main input controller, the data entry controller , and two Left / right cursor keys to change parameters. This method has many advantages, especially the that at the required Hardware knobs, switches, buttons etc. - so many functions control is greatly reduced. (Had the KS-32 a separate controller for each parameter, it would have hundreds of them.)

There is a simple method, the value of a parameter to zero set when "zero" of the average value. Press the down button and to the Up button and let then quickly release both buttons. This sets the Set automatically to the center position.

Screens By the 32-digit LCD display it is possible to obtain information in so-called. Display screens (screens). Each time one of the front Panel buttons is pressed, a new screen is practically called. Is called such a screen, you can see the individual functions of this Read and change screens.

2 - 12

Page 49 KS-32 user guide Multiple parameters

Part 2 - Overview

Some of the KS-32 screens contain more than one editable parameters. If such a screen called, there are two ways between These parameters toggle: • The left / right cursor keys. These keys are used by the individual parameters of a screen "scroll" and at the end of the next Changed screen. • The screen buttons. By repeatedly pressing a screen button is "scroll" through the parameters of the respective screens. Holding the Screen button for about a second, the first parameter of the screen is called.

Change of a parameter Suppose you want the mood of the current voice of the currently change the selected sound. That is a pitch parameters, so must First, the pitch call-Bank. Which can be reached by pressing the Edit - Sound - key followed by the Pitch button ( Bank 1 ) and Screen 0 The. Display will look like this. Oct 0 = + = + 00 Semi Fine = + 00

The Oct (Octave) parameter appears. This value is flashing, which means that said parameter is selected and now can be changed.

The value of the currently selected parameter on a screen flashes Always. If you have selected a parameter, you can use the Data Entry Controller or with the up / down cursor change its value: • Move the slider, you can use the parameter over the entire Change area. A slow movement changes the parameters relative to its previous value. A fast moving leaves him on The value jumps corresponding to the position of the controller. • Use the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons to increase or decrease you the value by one step. Press and hold one of the keys are run through the values quickly. If you edit multiple voices simultaneously, adding to the Edit Sound Voice Select Screen ( bank 0, Screen 1 set), the value "ALL" is to be with the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor the values of the individual Voices relative change each other, rather than for all the voices in the displayed To incorporate value.

Tip :

It git a simple method parameter to "submit" to mean a have, as the pitch / Octave parameter in this example. While you

2 - 13

Page 50 Part 2 - Overview

KS-32 user guide the Down • No cursor hold, press the Up • Yes-cursor (Or vice versa) and then release both buttons simultaneously. Thereby the parameter is set exactly to the mean. Change a parameter when you call another screen, there and then return to the pitch bank, Screen 0 go, there is the last flashing selected parameter again. The KS-32 "remembers" the respective last selected parameters on each screen. Make sure that the parameter you want to change is really dialed before the data entry control or the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor keys to move. There is always some Parameters on each screen active, so be careful that you do not accidentally the wrong change.

About this Guide The KS-32 assigns its parameters and commands in the so-called screens on. Each screen has his own addressing , a two-digit number, indicating its position. The first number refers to the bank to which he heard the second number is the position of the screen in this bank. This Position on the bench and screen called keys. In this owner certain parameters or commands be addressed is an illustration of the exact position of the Displayed parameter and how to deal with a "speed dial number" there reaches. It looks for example like this: Screen address: Bank # Screen # Parameter

Click Volume / Pan Click Click Press Edit Seq / preset / click (Bank 2) / Screen. 1 Bank Name

Help for finding the Param.

These representations do not only facilitate the classification of these instructions in certain sections, but they also contain the following four important Information about the parameter which is being treated: • Screen-address - The two-digit number represents the position of the Parameter. In this case "21". • Parameter Name - This is the name of the parameter. To English, as it appears in the display. Has a screen more than one Parameters, these are separated by slashes (/). • Bank Name - Displays the bank in which the screen is. The Name is found in the list of bank name again, which the bank Are keys of the KS-32 • Help to find - here is how to get to the parameter. LED is illuminated, the mode button does not need to be pressed again be.

2 - 14

Page 51 KS-32 user guide Note :

Part 2 - Overview Sometimes for a screen addressing any bank number is available; For example, the screen addresses graphics for Edit Mode and Track System • MIDI mode. They are with ET and SM shown.

KS-32 Accessories The following optional accessories at your ENSONIQ available dealers: • SW 5 / SW-10 footswitch - This dual footswitch can be used for sustain, Sostenuto or used to start and stop the sequencer

be. • CVP-1 Pedal - A voltage control pedal, either as Modulation source within a Voice or as a volume pedal can be used. • MC-32 RAM cards - To store sounds and sequences That you have created or edited. Sounds and sequences on a MC-32 are stored exactly as in the internal memory. • ROM cards SC Series - Contains 160 additional factory sounds. In the Unlike the MC-32, the sounds on a SD-card permanently stored and can not be deleted. • ROM cards ISC Series - Contains 160 sounds by leading sound Developers from around the world. In contrast to the MC-32, the sounds are on an SC card securely stored and can not be deleted. • SQX 70 - sequencer memory expansion. Increases the capacity of the KS-32 sequencer to 58,000 notes. Request more information to install your authorized ENSONIQ dealers.

2-15

Page 53 52 KS-32 user guide

Part 3 - System • MIDI settings

Part 3 - System • MIDI settings • These parameters cover instrument cross-system and MIDI Functions from. Master Tune ............................................... .............................................. 3 - 2 Global Bend ............................................... .............................................. 3 - 2 Touch........................................................................................................3 - 2 FtswL - Foot Switch Left ........................................... ........................... 3-7 Pedal .........................................................................................................3 - 8 MIDI parameters ............................................... ........................................ 3-9 Base-Channel............................................................................................3 - 9 Base channel MIDI Status .............................................. ........................... 3-10 Basic Channel Afterouch type .............................................. ........................ 3-10 MIDI Mode - MIDI In Fashion ......................................... ..................... 3-11 MONO mode ............................................... .......................................... 3-12 Global controller in MONO mode ........................................... .......... 3-12 XCtrl - External controller .............................................. ...................... 3-12 Controller ................................................. ............................................. 3 - 13 ENSONIQ Bank's special "tax" -Programmwechselbefehle ........ 3-14 Selecting a new sequence / song-effect via MIDI ......................... 3-14 System Excl - System Exclusive messages ....................................... 3 - 15 MIDI Trk Name ............................................. ........................................ 3 - 16 MIDI loop ............................................... .............................................. 3 - 16

The System • MIDI button The System • MIDI button leads to various screens. This Screens provide access to the system and MIDI parameters, complete the Affect instrument. These parameters remain continuously active - Even when the KS-32 is turned off. Press the System • MIDI to key in the System • MIDI mode to reach. Press the screen keys 0 to 9 to the various System • MIDI parameters to achieve. The KS-32 remains in the current Mode (Sound mode or Sequence / Preset mode). If the System • MIDI Button from the Select Sound Mode from was then jump the KS-32 at Press a bank - key in edit mode sounds. The same happens from the Sequence / Preset mode, skip the KS-32 when you press a Bank button in the Sequence / Preset Edit mode.

3-1

Page 54 Part 3 - System • MIDI settings SM 0

KS-32 user guide

Master Tune / Global Bend System MIDI Edit Press System • MIDI / Screen 0th

Master Tune = +00 Global Bend = 02

Master Tune Adjusts the overall pitch of the keyboard to the extent of one semitone up and down. The value of +00 entstpricht the pitch A = 440 Hz. Scope: -99 to +99 cents.

Global Bend Specifies the control range for the Pitch Bend wheel. Each step corresponds to a semitone. Follow the value of an "H", react only hand-held notes on pitch Bend. Sounds that are held with the sustain pedal, do not respond and keep their pitch. This allows typical guitar-effects produce. Area:

SM 1

0 to 12, 1 H-12H in semitones

Touch / Pressure Threshold System • MIDI Edit Press System • MIDI / Screen. 1

Touch = PIANO VEL1 Pressure = MEDIUM

Touch Here, the sensitivity of the keyboard is set to match your personal feel. All dynamic curves relate to both internal as well controlled MIDI sounds. There are 14 different settings: • PIANO VEL1

• SYNTH VEL1

• FIXED V 64

• PIANO VEL2 • PIANO VEL3 • PIANO VEL4 • PIANO VEL5 • PIANO VEL6

• SYNTH VEL2 • SYNTH VEL3 • SYNTH VEL4 • SYNTH VEL5 • SYNTH VEL6

• FIXED V 127

3-2

Page 55 KS-32 user guide Note:

Part 3 - System • MIDI settings If you use a PIANO curve, you will hear no sound when you easily strike. This corresponds exactly to a real piano. With the SYNTH curves you hear always a sound, even with very light Stop. That is the only difference between PIANO and SYNTH Dynamic curves.

Dynamic Curve diagram 127 96 MIDI Note On 64 Velocity 32 0 0

64 96 Keyboard Velocity

127

The dynamic curves (Touch) offer a wide range expressive techniques, as shown in the following pages: VEL1 127 96 64 32 0 0

127

• PIANO / SYNTH VEL1 - For someone with a slight Anchlag. In this Setting can be the maximum value of each dynamics-controlled Parameters reach very easily.

3-3

Page 56 Part 3 - System • MIDI settings

KS-32 user guide

VEL2 127 96 64 32 0 0

127

• PIANO / SYNTH VEL 2 - For someone with a little more velocity, but still easy. VEL3 127 96 64 32 0 0

127

• PIANO / SYNTH VEL3 - The default setting for average Stop. This setting should fit most musicians. VEL4 127 96 64 32 0 0

127

• PIANO / SYNTH VEL4 - This setting corresponds most closely to the "Classically" trained pianist with strong fingers and offers trained musicians the largest dynamic range.

3-4

Page 57 KS-32 user guide

Part 3 - System • MIDI settings VEL5 127 96 64 32 0 0

127

• PIANO / SYNTH VEL5 - This setting is for musicians with strong Fingers who prefer a softer sound, it requires a lot of power for the loud sounds.

VEL6 127 96 64 32 0 0

127

• PIANO / SYNTH VEL6 - This setting is for musicians who much Want to have control over their soft stop. The curve has much Space for a continuous increase in the volume with a "Jump" at the end of volume accents. FIXED V 64 127 96 64 32 0 0

127

• FIXED V 64 - This setting is a fixed value of dynamic medium intensity transmitted at each stop-strength. This setting is well suited for the simulation old synthesizer sounds without dynamic control.

3-5

Page 58 Part 3 - System • MIDI settings

KS-32 user guide FIXED V127

127 96 64 32 0 0

127

• FIXED V128 - This is also a fixed value, this time at full intensity. Good for drums / percussion sounds if the part without dynamic Change to be recorded.

Note:

We recommend that you start with the default setting (VEL3) and then scroll up or down until the desired effect is achieved is.

:3-6

Page 59 KS-32 user guide

Part 3 - System • MIDI settings

Pressure Threshold This parameter can aftertouch sensitivity of the Customize Keyboard personal playing. There are four Settings Pressure: SOFT, MED, FIRM and HARD. The PressureThreshold can be between SOFT (soft, miminaler effort required) and FIRM (hard, maximum force required) be set. • SOFT - This setting is designed specifically for Musikter playing softly. In this setting, even a slight push to the maximum Aftertouch modulation to achieve. • MEDIUM - A little more pressure is needed to complete aftertouch to reach. • FIRM - Corresponds to the average aftertouch sensitivity. This setting should be perceived as pleasant in most cases be. • HARD - The setting for the musician with very hard. Requires the highest effort to see the full aftertouch To achieve modulation.

SM 2

FtswL / FtswR System • MIDI Edit Press System • MIDI / Screen. 2

FtswL = UNUSED FtswR = SUSTAIN

FtswL - Foot Switch Left This parameter applies only if the additional double foot Is SW-5 / SW-10 is connected. Then the entries for the left apply Pedal. • UNUSED - The KS-32 ignores the Left Footswitch

If you're using the included foot switch (SW-6), should this Parameters to be UNUSED. • SOSTENUTO - turns the sostenuto pedal footswitch. All keyboard will be held, all subsequently played notes attenuated. • START / STOP - The foot switch takes over the function of the Stop • Continue button in the sequencer, so Stop or Continue (Next Play).

3-7

Page 60 Part 3 - System • MIDI settings

KS-32 user guide

FtswR - Foot-Switch-Right Controls the function of the supplied Fußschalers SW-6 or the right pedal in SW 5 / SW-10 (optional). • SUSTAIN - Keeps the notes even after releasing the keys, such as the right pedal on a piano. • START / STOP footswitch -The takes over the function of the Stop • Continue button in the sequencer, so Stopping and continue playing.

Note:

SM 3

Both sustain and sostenuto pedals can be used to the current aftertouch modulation value "hold". And here's how: 1) Select a sound that responds to aftertouch. The most suitable a standing sound such. as the oboe. 2) Play a note and modulate it with aftertouch. 3) Press and hold the sustain or sostenuto pedal. 4) Release the button. You will hear that the sound still is modulated with aftertouch - with the same intensity as to the Time when you release the button. 5) Now play a different note. Note that the new note not is modulated. You can now use the new note, regardless of the held modulate. Once the value of the new note to the old exceeds the value of the new note is taken of both tones. 6) To remove the modulation on the held note, simply the same button again, or simply release the pedal.

Pedal / voice muting System • MIDI EditPress System • MIDI / Screen. 3

Pedal = MOD # 4 Voice muting = ON

Pedal Determines whether the additional CVP-1 pedal as a volume or Pedal acts: • Volume # 7 - The foot pedal controls the volume of the KS-32. • Mod # 4 -The foot pedal controls all parameters PEDAL than Use modulation source. The "7" and "4" refers to the controller number in the MIDI Specification. Read more in the MIDI implementation in Appendix 2 .

3-8

Page 61 KS-32 user guide

Part 3 - System • MIDI settings

Voice muting This parameter determines whether held tones when changing sounds should be cut off or not. It can cause interference in Avoid effect change. Or you can use the advantage of seamless Transition between different sounds.

• ON - Every time you open a new sound, are still sounding notes cut off. • OFF - When you visit a new sound, sound sustained notes still ahead until you strike with the old sound new again. The old notes have, however, run on the new effect, which possibly completely different coloring of the sound may result.

MIDI parameters Few developments have so much influence in recent years had on the development of music as MIDI. Whether you are simply two Keyboards interconnect synthesizer from a guitar-to-MIDI System play, or control a sampler with drum pads: MIDI makes it possible! MIDI has various developments brought together, and have other ideas first place. ENSONIQ was always in the first row when it comes to MIDI developments. The KS-32 provides it with its state-of-the-art sequencer, the master keyboard functions and its multi-mode sound generator the current state of development is.

SM 4

Base Channel / Status System • MIDI EditPress System • MIDI / Screen. 4

Base Channel = 01 Status = BOTH

Base Channel Specifies the base channel on which the KS-32 sends MIDI data and receives. The base channel is used to send MIDI data and received while the KS-32 is in the Sound Select Mode. If you are in a sequence or a preset, apply here selected MIDI parameters and the respective track channels. System Exclusive messages are always sent on the basic channel and received. Range: 01 to 16 Each of the 16 MIDI channels can be selected as the base channel. Which Effect, the basic channel depends on the selected MIDI mode.

3-9

Page 62 Part 3 - System • MIDI settings

KS-32 user guide

Receiving The POLY mode, notes, controllers and program exchange information only detected when you're at the Base channel are received. In the MONO-A-mode Program Change receive only the basic channel. This is simultaneously in both MONO mode, the first of 8 Individual channels, with which the KS-32 is operating. Send

The KS-32 has a fixed MIDI transmission scheme, depending on the the selected mode. In the sound-select mode sends the KS-32 always on the base channel. In sequencer mode transmits the KS-32 to the separate track channels.

Based channel MIDI Status This screen determines the MIDI status of the base channel. There are four possible settings: • play BOTH notes, controller and program change internal and (Via MIDI) external sounds on the selected MIDI channel. Incoming data play internal sounds. LOCAL • The base channel controls only internal sounds. There are no MIDI data sent. Control incoming MIDI data internal sounds of. • MIDI Notes, controller etc. are only sent via MIDI, if on

the keyboard is played. Incoming data control internal Sounds. This mode corresponds to the LOCAL OFF other Instruments. Take this fashion to external devices play. • * EXT * Has the same function as MIDI, with the difference that incoming MIDI data allude no internal sounds. The is useful if the KS-32 along with other MIDI Devices and an external sequencer operates.

SM 5

Base Channel Pressure System • MIDI Edit Press System • MIDI / Screen. 5

Base Channel Pressure = CHANNEL

Based channel Afterouch type Determines what type of aftertouch to the KS-32 received via MIDI. This parameter also determines whether on the basis of channel aftertouch to be / transferred internally externally or not. • NONE - The KS-32 receives no aftertouch and keyboard produces no aftertouch data.

3-10

Page 63 KS-32 user guide

Part 3 - System • MIDI settings • KEY - The KS-32 receives polyphonic aftertouch on the base channel via MIDI, while the keyboard still generates channel aftertouch. This particular type aftertouch allows an individual modulation for each key as many ENSONIQ , devices, such as EPS, EPS-16 PLUS SD-1, SD-1 32VOICE, SQ-80 and VFX VFX SD can be found. • CHANNEL - The KS-32 receives and transmits Channel Aftertouch (or monophonic aftertouch). This is the common form. Modulation always affects the entire keyboard.

Note: SM 6

The keyboard of the KS-32 itself can only generate Channel Aftertouch, However, both are received via MIDI aftertouch types.

MIDI Mode / XCtrl System • MIDI Edit Press System • MIDI / Screen. 6

MIDI Mode = OMNI XCtrl = 02

MIDI Mode - MIDI In Fashion This parameter determines how MIDI information from the KS-32 received are. MIDI mode has no influence on the transmission of MIDI information: There are five MIDI modes in the KS-32: • OMNI - In this mode, receives the KS-32 on all 16 MIDI Channels. This is useful if you only work with a few devices, and no separate channels are required. • POLY - In this mode, the KS-32 receives only the basic channel. Data on other channels are ignored. • MULTI - A ENSONIQ development. MULTI mode is the key for the use of the KS-32 as a multi-mode tone generator of a external sequencer driven. In MULTI mode, the eight tracks (Sequence or song) independently and polyphonic MIDI on 8 verschiednen Receive channels. It is easy to empty sequences as a template produce to receive the Multi-Mode; see Part 8 - Presets .

For each track on which is to be received, should have different MIDI channels can be set. This is done on the Edit track MIDI Channel Screen (See Part 8 - Presets ). In MULTI mode, it always depends on the MIDI channel, the received is that just sounds are listening to, regardless of the currently selected sound on the front panel.

Range 3 - 11

Page 64 Part 3 - System • MIDI settings

KS-32 user guide

MONO mode The MONO mode is particularly useful for use with MIDI Guitars, or whenever verchiedene 8, monophonic voices / channels seem sensible. The KS-32 has two different mono-mode. Receives in both modes the KS-32 monophonic eight independent channels, continuously numbered upwards from the base channel. The difference is the way in which how this information is forwarded in the KS-32. • MONO A - Another ENSONIQ evolution, the use of multi-channel controllers (such as guitars) to cope with. All notes and Controller always play the sound that has just been selected, such as from the keyboard. You have the advantage that each note on a separate channel is processed and the controller thus quite addressed individually, but you do not each track individually with a Sound must prove. • MONO B - This is the conventional MONO mode. Now here is each Track in the current sequence or a monophonic song Synthesizer. Only in this fashion can be for each string a guitar Set your own sound.

Global controller in MONO mode Global Controller is controller data transmitted on a channel be, but also affect other channels simultaneously. This can be useful to reduce incidental MIDI data and at the same time To avoid delays. Some Guitar Controller Send Global Controller; the KS-32 understands. In MONO mode (A or B) of the base channel minus one for the channel global controllers (Pitch Bend, Aftertouch, etc.). If the base channel For example, 3 Controller data on channel 2 as a global controller would be interpreted, and affect all voices played. If the Basic Channel 1, Channel 16 is a global controller channel. Nevertheless receives each track individually, the controller data on your own Receiving channel. For example, each string own pitch bend have, during the "whammy bar" controller on the global channel can be sent to then modulate all votes.

XCtrl - Remote Controller With XCtrl an external MIDI controller for the KS-32 can be used be. Area:

01 to 95 can

3-12

Page 65

KS-32 user guide

Part 3 - System • MIDI settings Most MIDI controller such. B.Modulationsrad or breath controller - Have a controller number and can as a modulator be individually assigned for many parameters in the KS-32. One of the modulation sources offered, the sound in Edit mode can be used XCTRL is. The value for "XCtrl" is a MIDI Controller number from 01 to 95. The KS-32 receives controller Messages depending on the controller number. If such Receive messages, they are at each passed parameter XCTRL as a modulation source has. Suppose you play the KS-32 of a keyboard with a breath controller, and this wish for Use modulation tasks in the KS-32. You can now program set in which modulates the filter cutoff of the KS-32 by XCTRL will. If you now "= 02 Xctrl" set the breath controller can now modulate the filter cutoff frequency, or any other parameter is modulated with XCTRL. The following controller numbers are recognized in the MIDI standard:

Number Controller 1 2 4 6 7 10

Number Controller

Modulation Breath-controller Pedal controller Data Entry knob Volume Panorama

64 Sustain Pedal 66 sostenuto pedal 70 patch Selects 71 Timbre 72 Release

Although the range is here 01 to 95, most numbers yet no fixed function. You can for future expansion of the MIDI standards are used.

SM 7

Controllers / Prog Change System • MIDI Edit Press System • MIDI / Screen. 7

Controller = OFF ProgChange = OFF

Controller This switch determines whether the KS-32 MIDI controller receives data or not (pitch bend, modulation wheel, aftertouch, Volume, Sustain Pedal, etc.).

ProgChange - Program Change This switch determines how the KS-32 MIDI Program Change processed.

3-13

Page 66 Part 3 - System • MIDI settings

KS-32 user guide

• OFF-The KS-32 is receiving or transmitting any MIDI program change or bank select commands. • ON - The KS-32 sends and receives MIDI program change or Bank Select messages.

Important :

Program changes will be displayed with Numern 001-128 displayed, although, as required by the MIDI specification as 000 to Sent 127. The same applies to the bank select commands. (If you want to know more about it, look into Part 8 - Presets and Part 9 - Sequencer bases after).

ENSONIQ Bank's special "tax" Program Change commands The way how to program change receive is something

complicated than in some other systems, because when the KS-32 Number of immediately available sounds of the possible MIDI Program change far exceeds. Therefore, the KS-32 uses the last four program change messages (124-127) to determine how to understand the following program changes are (the numbers refer to again on the MIDI messages actually sent). The following Table shows the effect of these four special commands:

for Program Change Currency: 124 125 126 127

select the following program Change Currency: 000..079 - INT Sounds 000..079 - ROM Sounds 000..079 - CARD-A-Sounds 000..079 - CARD B sounds

These particular "control" commands always need only once to be sent. All of the following program changes are geanuso treated again to follow such a command. Program Change 080 -099 choose always at the ready drum kit.

Note :

Selecting a new sequence / song-effect via MIDI There is a special command under the program change, the only MULTI mode is processed. With him are sound and effect together is called and in the respective track. If a Program Change 123 on any of the selected MIDI channels is received, takes the subsequent program changes the corresponding effect of the sound simultaneously with, and replaces the previous sequence or song effect. This is the only way how to automatically effects can change in a song unless manually or by calling another sequence. This can be useful when to the KS-32 operates with an external sequencer.

3-14

Page 67 KS-32 user guide

Part 3 - System • MIDI settings This special program change 123 has no effect on how other program changes are understood. If one of the "tax" Program change numbers for the same sound used to send this between the 123er and the actual exchange program.

Note : SM 8

All KS-32 program changes are displayed 001-128 and processed, transmitted via MIDI, however, as 000 to 127.

System Excl / Song Select System • MIDI EditPress System • MIDI / Screen. 8

System excl = ON Song Select = OFF

System Excl - System Exclusive messages This switch determines whether the KS-32 system exclusive messages is received or not. Is system excl = OFF, the KS-32 can not Receive SysEx messages. Nevertheless, always from the storage Screens from Sys-Ex are sent, no matter how the switch is (More this in the Appendix ).

Song Select This switch determines whether the KS-32 MIDI Song Select messages is received. Is a Song Select = OFF, ignores the KS-32, these commands. Is a Song Select = ON, call such commands the corresponding sequencer Memory locations.

MIDI song Selects # 00-99 call the corresponding Sequence / Song Memories # 00-99 on. Conversely sends the KS-32 Song Select 0099 when called the Sequence / Song memories # 00-99 on the device be.

3-15

Page 68 Part 3 - System • MIDI settings SM 9

KS-32 user guide

TrkName MIDI / MIDI loop System • MIDI EditPress System • MIDI / Screen. 9

MIDI TrkName = OFF MIDI loop = OFF

MIDI Trk name This parameter determines whether or preset sequencer track with MIDI or * EXT * Status the sound name (as in LOCAL or BOTH) or Show the MIDI channel ("MIDI CHAN #"). • OFF - If the track to MIDI or * EXT * ( Edit Track, Screen 5 ), is displayed instead of the sound name for MIDI channel. This is helpful, when the CS-32 as a MIDI controller, master keyboard or sequencer for other MIDI equipment is used. It is immediately apparent that trace over MIDI is sent, and on what channel. • ON - The sound track name will always appear regardless of which track Status is selected.

MIDI Loop Here it is determined whether the KS-32 incoming MIDI data as standard To read data, or "looped" data from the MIDI Out of the KS-32. If the KS-32 Keyboard Box as external sequencers use, it is often not from that data from the MIDI Out of the KS-32 back go to the MIDI In. This can lead to confusion, when it comes to MIDI feedback (z. B. It may be that a MIDI loop, the volume of a track on 0 draws). With the MIDI Loop parameter can be the KS-32 even in such situations without Use problems. • OFF - The KS-32 receives MIDI data normally. This is the Factory setting. • ON - The KS-32 filters incoming MIDI data, it makes such Ignored information that could lead to problems.

Set this parameter if the KS-32 in a MIDI Use loop.

3-16

Page 69 KS-32 user guide

Part 4 - Effects

Part 4 - Effects To understand the KS-32 effects ........................................... ............. 4 - 1 Sound-Effekte...........................................................................................4 - 2 Preset / Sequence / Song Effects ........................................... ...................... 4 - 2 The programming of the effects .............................................. ............... 4 - 2 The effects loops ................................................ ......................................... 4 - 3 Mixture of effects ............................................... ................................ 4 - 4 Selects effects ............................................... ................................. 4 - 5 Sounds and presets ............................................... .................................... 4 - 5 When will new effects loaded into the ESP chip? ........................... 4 - 5 Assignment of sounds and effects in the Sequence / Preset Mode ............ 4 - 6 Modulation effect ................................................ .................................... 4 - 6 Ramps.......................................................................................................4 - 8 Controller assignment of effects ............................................... ............... 4-9 Effect parameters ............................................... ....................................... 4-9 CONCERT REVERB ................................................ ................... 4 - 10 8-VOICE.CHORUS ............................................. ......................... 4-11 PHASE SHIFTER ................................................ ........................ 4-12 CHORUS & REVERB ............................................... .................. 4 - 13 Flanger + REVERB.1 & 2 ........................................... ............. 4 - 13 PHASER + REVERB ............................................... ...................... 4-14 ROTORY SPKR + VERB .............................................. ................ 4 - 16 DIST + CHORUS + VERB ............................................. ................. 4-17 CMPRSS + DIST + VERB ............................................. .................. 4-18

To understand the KS-32 effects The KS-32 has built a powerful effects processor, with a Can produce variety of different effects. And what else is important: This feature is fully integrated into the synthesizer, not just added. The flexible effects loops and the possibility of Real-time control make the effects section of the KS-32 so dynamic . The KS-32 is a specially developed ENSONIQ signal processor (ESP). this is a third generation of digital Oscillator chip (DOC III) and an external 16 bit digital to analogue converter, to ensure a high quality output. The effects unit was on the other hand to complete the many Performance parameters of the KS-32 designed for many of the effects certain parameters, by playing aids such as the modulation Aftertouch, timbre control sources include controllable. The effects are, of course, fully programmable, and can be used for modify each application. Effects are usually as part of a Sounds stored. Moreover, also each sequence, each preset and each song its own effect program. Each type of effect is somewhat handled differently. Read more in the following part.

4-1

Page 70 Part 4 - Effects

KS-32 user guide

Sound Effects Every sound in the KS-32 has its own effect program, with all associated parameters. This effect is also active when all votes "Dry" are past the Effects section. Each time you Save a sound, save the settings of the

Effects unit. The associated with the sound effect by pressing the Effects button ( Bank 8 ) in the Edit Sound -mode displayed and edited. The corresponding Parameters are exactly the section "Effect Parameters" in this part discussed.

Preset / Sequence / Song Effects Each preset, each sequence and each song has its own effect, including the corresponding parameters. This effect is also active when all Testimonials "dry" past the Effects section (ie, when all the tracks on the DRY Buss lie). The effect works on all sequencers Tracks (or specific voices in the respective sound) obtained by through one of the effects loops. The effect is with the preset, sequence or song stored. It remains unchanged until a new song or a new Preset or a new sequence is called or the effect manually is processed. A special program change command in the MULTIFashion can be used to load new effects in a sequence (see Description of the MIDI bank in Part 3 - System • MIDI) . The sequence corresponding to the effect by pressing the Effects button ( Bank 8 ) from the Edit Seq / Preset - display and edit mode out be.

The programming of the effects The effects of the KS-32 are fully programmable. There is different effect parameters for each effect type. On the first screen takes the effect selection. With the selection effect it has a Special feature: Its setting affects all subsequent screens whose Design and Display. Here is a new effect is selected, a is quite Loading new effect preset in the ESP and the following things happen: If a new effect is selected: • Loading a new effect preset, giving a brief interruption in the Output brings with it. • be rebuilt parameters screens for the new effect. • are brought these parameters in a factory setting, as preset Effect.

4-2

Page 71 KS-32 user guide Tip :

Part 4 - Effects If you select a new effect, you can choose between the Change individual effects without the unpleasant delay by Just quickly with the data entry knob to scroll through the table. When you reach the desired effect, wait a Moment, and the new effect is called.

The effects loops The output of each KS-32 voice (Voice) is in a stereo effect out. This FX combines all the signals to a stereo mix together, like a real mixing desk. Of the three paths of the KS-32 lead two in the effects unit (FX 1 and FX 2), while the third way, the Dry signal to the ESP passes (DRY). The assignment of the paths occurs in the output database. These settings can preset and Sequencer track will be "overruled" by other assignments ( Edit Track, Screen 1 ).

Single effect

DRY L

Pan

Vol

L FX1

FX1

Effect 1

Main outputs

Voice output FX2

FX2

Target Bus The graph shows the effects loops and the mixture of signals at the output. Every voice runs through one of the three effect sends, passes through the effect apparatus or is passed to it. The thick lines indicate the Stereo signal.

4-3

Page 72 Part 4 - Effects

KS-32 user guide

Mixture of effects All effects their attitude of the two paths FX1 and FX2. They are below the effect name on the selection page, the first Screen (Screen 0) the effect bank (Bank 8). The screen looks like this: Selection effect

CONCERT FX1 =

REVERB 25

FX2 =

FX1 Mix

FX2 Mix

If a single effect (such as reverb) is selected, both paths run over this effect. If a double or multi-effects used runs FX1 generally second by both or all effects, while FX 2 only by the Effect is running.

Multi Effects

DRY Vol

Pan

L R

FX1

Effect 1

Mix1

Effect 2

L R

Voice output FX2

Main outputs

Mix2

Target Bus If the selected effect a combined effect of more than one function (Such as chorus and reverb), FX1 and FX2 through the first to the second Effect. The MIX control of FX2 controls the amount of the second effect for all

Sounds passing this way. FX1 mix determines the Vehältnis of effect from the first signal coming from the second effect and the dry output. At extreme settings of these parameters , the two effects either in parallel or in series be. (For some multi-effects there is even a separate MIX control at the output of effect 1).

4-4

Page 73 KS-32 user guide

Part 4 - Effects

Selects effects The first parameter of Effects - Bank used to select a particular Effect. Any change causes a completely new "effects package" with all parameters and their default values is called. The effects are available: CONCERT REVERB HALL.REVERB ROOM.REVERB HOT CHAMBER 8-VOICE CHORUS

large concert hall, very dense reverb Hall with transverse reflections Simulation of a small room Warm room with charakteritischer resonance Eight voice chorus with complex Modulation CHORUS & REVERB Four-Part Chorus, with kombinert Hall Flanger + REVERB.1 Flanger combined with Hall Flanger + REVERB.2 (variation combined with modulations) PHASE SHIFTER Stereo Phaser with selectable speed undTiefe PHASER REVERB + Phaser combined with Hall ROTORY SPKR + VERB rotating speaker simulation with Hall DIST + CHORUS + VERB Chorus with distortion and reverb CMPRSS + DIST + VERB Compressor, distortion and reverb. Strong for Simulation of guitar amps with acoustic feedback

Sounds and presets The full effects setup, including the values of all parameters, is stored along with each sound. It will also together with each sequence / each preset stored. The KS-32 does its best when switching between effects. Nevertheless, there is a short Pause when effect programs are changed.

When will new effects loaded into the ESP chip? According to these rules decided by the KS-32, when to switch effects are: • If a new sound is selected, also changes the corresponding Effect. • If a new sequence / a preset is selected, appears corresponding Sequence / Preset effects. • Whenever the sound mode to the sequences / presets mode is changed (by the Select Seq / Preset or Edit Seq / Preset button is pressed), the sequence effect is loaded. The same happens when will change from the sequences / presets mode to the sound mode (By the Select Sound or Sound Edit button presses). • If a sound over the Replace-track sound function in a existing preset / sequence is imported, the effect does not change. • If you press a track button while the sound track Replace button held , is the current sound from the sound mode is together with its effect in the current preset or dieSequenz / the Song loaded.

4-5

Page 74 Part 4 - Effects

KS-32 user guide • If you press the Make Default Preset - button, the current sound of the sound mode with its effect fetched in the Seq / preset edit buffer. • If the MIDI a special program change message (# 123) MULTI mode is received, then the effect of the following Program change that the corresponding sound with its effect in the current sequence is loaded. • When storing the current sound or the preset / the sequence is the corresponding effect with stored. • When layered together a sound / track in a preset / sequence or song is, the effect changes not . Whenever a new effect is loaded into the ESP-chip, a ensteht brief interruption to the audio output so that belonging to the effect Data can be loaded into the ESP. If an effect only through the setting of its parameters is different (but the same algorithm used), this interruption does not arise.

Assignment of sounds and effects in the Sequence / Preset Mode The KS-32 is in preset / Sequencer mode, the effect of which can currently selected sequence / preset by pressing the Effects button ( Bank 8 ) be processed. The Effects button calls the Effects on -Bank. You can then use the Screen buttons call up the different parameters of the bank. Normally, the different voices in a sequence the fed three effects paths, as shown in the edit sound output -Bank. In the Track Edit mode, the assignment within the individual sounds be overruled. The various Edit track - Output Bus settings are: • -DRY- send all comments to the dry way. • -FX1- sends FX2 votes to FX1; FX1 and stay DRY. • -FX2- sends FX1 votes to FX2; FX2 and stay DRY. • VOICE reserves the normal allocation unchanged. • CNTRL maintains the normal allocation and directs the controller Information to this effect. This is the factory Default of the track after the election of a first sounds. See Part 8 - Presets for more details.

Effect modulation For all effects is an important control parameters in real time possible. With the exception of the rotary speaker effect using all the same modulation control screen (the modulation of the Rotary SpeakerEffect is discussed in more detail later).

4-6

Page 75 KS-32 user guide

Part 4 - Effects

Mod target

Modulate by

FX1-MIX

MODPEDAL

Mod Source

+00

Intensity

The exact position of this screen depends on the selected effect, is but always the last screen in the Effect Bank. The screen has three Parameters: • Mod destination - Here it is determined which effect parameters to be modulated. Which can be modulated, depends on the each effect from. • Source Mod - Here the modulation source is determined. • Mod Amount - This is where the strength of the modulation is set. The following modulation sources are influencing the effects of Available:

Modulation source

Is modulated by

KEYBOARD VELOCITY PRESSURE PITCHWHL ModWheel MODPEDAL XCONTROL how SUS PEDAL Timbral

Note the number of the last pressed key the average velocity aftertouch the value of the pitch wheel the value of the modulation wheel the value of the expression pedal the value of the selectable MIDI controller eg a Breath Controller pressing the sustain pedal the value of the parameter timbral this Tracks when it is on CONTROL (see below) one of the six envelope structures nothing

RAMPS 1-6 OFF

4-7

Page 76 Part 4 - Effects

KS-32 user guide

Ramps Six of the possible modulation sources are called ramps. These are hüllkurvenähnliche structures which addressed the parameter Modulate time level of time, depending on the selected level. There are also a release time that is active after releasing the button. The illustration below shows the various Ramps:

Ramp 1 Pressed any key

0 .1 1 4 Attack Time in seconds

Released all notes

0 .1 1 4 Release time in seconds

Ramp 2 Pressed any key

0 .1 1 4 Attack Time in seconds

Released all notes

0 .1 1 4 Release time in seconds

Ramp 3 Pressed any key

Released all notes

0 .1 1 4 Attack Time in seconds

0 .1 1 4 Release time in seconds

Ramp 4 Pressed any key

Released all notes

0 .1 1 4 Attack Time in seconds

0 .1 1 4 Release time in seconds

4-8

Page 77 KS-32 user guide

Part 4 - Effects

Ramp 5 Pressed any key

Released all notes

0 .1 1 4 Attack Time in seconds

0 .1 1 4 Release time in seconds

Ramp 6 Pressed any key

Released all notes

0 .1 1 4 Attack Time in seconds

0 .1 1 4 Release time in seconds

Controller assignment of effects With effects real-time control, it is sometimes desirable to decide on which track are taken over the data controller to. This applies especially to use in MULTI mode. If there is more as a track on CNTRL, there may be a "controller chaos." Stands a track to VOICE, the assignments are copied without Controller influence the effect (as AFTERTOUCH, timbral Controller or ModWheel etc.).

Effect parameters All effect parameters are located in the Effects -Bank ( Bank 8 ) in the Sound Edit mode and the Sequence / Preset Edit mode. Each of the types of effects has various screens with individual parameters belong. Some parameters appear again and again, while others are specific to certain effects are related. The first screen is at all effects akin. The following then vary more or less. They contain the specific parameters. Each effect has a mix FX1 and FX2 a mix parameters, plus different individual parameters. All are programmable and provide for maximum flexibility in the processing of the effects.

4-9

Page 78 Part 4 - Effects

KS-32 user guide

Simple effects - Reverb CONCERT REVERB; HALL REVERB; ROOM REVERB; WARM CHAMBER The effects in this category produce a single, high-resolution Stereo effect such. B. Hall studio quality or kompexen Chorus. The FX1 and FX2 paths can be used to various mixtures to achieve the same effect. CONCERT REVERB is a concert hall, good for long release times. HALL REVERB is a Hall with intersecting reflections. ROOM REVERB is dieSimulation a room. WARM-CHAMBER is a warm room reverb with characteristic Resonance. The parameters for these four effects algorithms are:

Decay Time Area: 0 to 99 This is the time it takes for the Hall, up to a very low level (-60 DB) subside after stayed the input signal.

Diffusion Area: 00 to 99 This parameter determines whether the individual reflections as a series Repetitions (low values) or as a diffuse mixture (high values) . occur

Detune rate Area: 00 to 99 This parameter controls the LFO speed for the detuning, entering through the Hall. This detuning creates a natural slight pitch shift the signal.

Detune Depth Area: 00 to 99 This parameter controls the amount of detuning. Low values produce a metallic sound. For some sounds you need very low values.

HF Damping - High-frequency attenuation Area: 0 to 99 The HF Damping parameter controls the amount of treble attenuation of the The reverb sound. As with natural reverberation chambers, swallows the Means high frequencies. The higher the value, the stronger the Height loss.

4 - 10

Page 79 KS-32 user guide

Part 4 - Effects RF Bandwidth - High Bandwidth Area: 00 to 99 The RF bandwidth parameter acts as a low pass filter on the

Hall signal and controls high frequencies, the signal from the original in the Hall flows. The higher the value, the more highs pass through the Hall.

Low Frequency Decay (not HOT CHAMBER) Area: -99 To +99 This parameter changes the Decay low frequencies in the Hall.

Individual effects - modulation effects 8-VOICE.CHORUS This is a complex stereo chorus with eight different voices and differently adjusted LFO's.

Chorus Rate Area: 00 to 99 This parameter controls the eight speeds at which the Decelbe modulated delay times of the chorus.

Chorus Depth Area: 00 to 99 Here the amount of modulation is determined.

Chorus Center Area: 00 to 99 This parameter determines the delay middle of the chorus. With this Parameters can be changed, the tonal character.

Feedback Area: -99 To +99 This parameter controls the intensity of the positive or negative Feedback (feedback) on the chorus.

4-11

Page 80 Part 4 - Effects

KS-32 user guide

PHASE SHIFTER A 12-pin stereo phaser with controllable speed and intensity, in the style of the old phaser effect devices.

Phaser rate Area: 00 to 99 Sets the modulation speed.

Phaser Depth Area: 00 to 99 Sets the amount of modulation.

Phaser Center Area: 00 to 99 Determines the average modulation. A value of "50" sets the Center right in the middle. Then the effect is the strongest.

Feedback Area: -99 To +99 Determines the amount of feedback on the effect.

Stereo Cross Feedback Area: -99 To +99 Supplies the signal to the input of the other side and produces while a stereo feedback effect.

Warning :

Be careful when setting this parameter! Some feedback Combinations can produce loud sine waves and ears Speakers may be harmful. Always start with low Values â&#x20AC;&#x2039;and increase the amount slowly.

Phaser Level Area: 00 to 99 This parameter controls the amount of modulation in relation to Overall signal. Usually this should always stand on 99.

Invert Input Area: ON / OFF Here, the input signal can be inverted before returning it to the Is mixed effect signal. Reverts the effect in practice.

4-12

Page 81 KS-32 user guide

Part 4 - Effects

Multi-effects The remaining effects usually have a standard Hall on FX2, combined with another effect on FX1. With the FX1 Mix parameter it can be determined how much of the FX1 effect is to run through the Hall. The decay of the reverb always appear on the first screen for these multi-effects. CHORUS & REVERB A combination of a four-part chorus and reverb. Sounds by Run FX1, have both effects, sounds FX2 have only the Hall.

Decay Time HF Damping - High Frequency Damping See detailed explanation under Hall in the single-effect group. Chorus Rate Range: 00 to 99 This parameter controls the speed of the modulation.

Chorus Depth Range: 00 to 99 This parameter controls the amount of modulation.

Chorus Center Range: 00 to 99 This parameter determines the delay middle of the chorus. With this Parameters can be changed, the tonal character.

Feedback Range: -99 to +99 This parameter controls the amount of feedback (feedback) on the chorus.

Chorus Level Range: 00 to 99 Determines the mixing ratio between original and effect signal.

Flanger + REVERB.1 & 2 Flanger 1 is a Chorus with only one LFO. Flanger 2 has two LFOs with various speeds. FX1 la端ft over both effects, FX2 only through the Hall.

Decay Time HF Damping - High Frequency Damping so

Flange rate Range: 00 to 99 Controls the speed of the Flanger effect.

4-13

Page 82 Part 4 - Effects

KS-32 user guide Flange Depth Area: 00 to 99 Controls the intensity of the Flanger effect.

Flange Center Area: 00 to 99 Determines the average for the modulation.

Feedback Area: -99 To +99 Adjusts the amount of feedback in the Flanger effect. Plus or minus determines the polarity of the effect.

Flange Level Area: 00 to 99 Adjusts the overall intensity of the effect and should be set to 99 to To achieve maximum effect.

Invert Input Range: ON / OFF Here, the input signal can be inverted before returning it to the Is mixed effect signal. Reverts the effect in practice. PHASER REVERB + 12-pin Phaser Hall. FX1 has two effects, only the FX2 Hall.

Decay Time HF Damping - High Frequency Damping so

Phaser rate Area: 00 to 99 Determines the phaser speed.

Phaser Depth Area: 00 to 99 Determines the intensity of the phaser.

Phaser Center Area: 00 to 99 Determines the average for the modulation.

Feedback Area: -99 To +99 Feedback Contribution to phaser effect.

Phaser Level Area: 00 to 99 Determines the overall level of the effect. Should normally be 99 . are

4-14

Page 83 KS-32 user guide

Part 4 - Effects Invert Input Area: ON / OFF Inverts the input signal before the phaser and reversing the effect so to.

4-15

Page 84 Part 4 - Effects

KS-32 user guide

ROTORY SPKR + VERB The classic organ effect, here in combination with Hall. FX1 has both Effects, only the FX2 Hall.

Decay Time HF Damping - High Frequency Damping so

Slow speed Range: 00 to 99 Determines the speed in the slow setting ("slow").

Fast Speed Range: 00 to 99 Determines the speed in the fast setting ("fast").

Rotor Center Range: 00 to 99 Determines the center acts from which the LFO.

Rotor Depth Range: 00 to 99 Determines the intensity of the LFO.

Speed Mode Here is the type of switching between the two speeds determined. • CONTIN - (Continuous) This setting controls the Modulation source directly the speed. • SWITCH - Selects the modulation source acts as a switch with the Effect is turned up or down. Even the typical delay is imitated. • TOGGLE - Any movement of the modulation source triggers a switch the speed of, from slow to fast, from fast to slowly. Good for use with foot pedals.

ModSrc - Modulation Source Sets the modulation source fixed for the rotary speaker effect. The available sources are the same as in the list at the beginning of Chapter.

Note:

If a voice or a track is assigned to FX1, have the Edit Sound Voice Pan and Edit Track - Track Pan parameter no audible effect on the sound. The rotor speaker effect lifts all pan settings on.

4-16

Page 85 KS-32 user guide

Part 4 - Effects

DIST + CHORUS + VERB Chorus with distortion and reverb. FX1 sounds have chorus and reverb, have either with or without distortion (see diagram), FX2 Sounds only the Hall.

DIST + CHORUS + REVERB Signal

Vol

Pan

FX1 On The Left Dist

Chorus

Mix1

FX1 On The Right

Voice output

Reverb

L R

Mix2 FX2 Target Bus

Decay Time so

Distortion Level Area: 00 to 99 This parameter controls the output level of the distortion effect. The Input level is determined by the volume and pan position of the each voice set.

Chorus Rate

Main Outputs

Area: 00 to 99 Controls the speed of the chorus.

Chorus Depth Area: 00 to 99 Controls the depth of the chorus.

Chorus Center Area: 00 to 99 Controls the delay time of the chorus.

Feedback Area: -99 To +99 Feedback intensity. +/- Determines the polarity of the feedback.

Chorus Level Area: 00 to 99 Determines the ratio of original and effect signal.

4-17

Page 86 Part 4 - Effects

KS-32 user guide

CMPRSS + DIST + VERB A trippy guitar effect, not only with Compressor, Distortion, and Hall, but also with flanger and equalizer. FX1 sounds through all Effects, FX2 sounds only the Hall.

CMPRSS + DIST + REVB Signal

DRY

Reverb to Cmprss Feedback

Flange

Comp

Distort

Mix1

FX1

L Reverb R Mix2

FX2

Decay Time HF Damping - High Frequency Damping so

Flange rate Area: 00 to 99 Controls the flanger speed. In 00 of the flanger is turned off.

Compression Area: 00 to 99 This parameter controls the starting point of the compressor. If the Input from, the compressor raises the level again, whatever the Feedback increased. The normal compression is "72".

Distortion Level - (In and Out) These two parameters determine input and output levels for the Distortion effect. The range of both parameters is 00-11, based on the Tufnel theorem, which states that "10" is not loud is enough, which is why you can go to "11" here.

Reverb to Cmprss Feedback Area: -99 To +99 This parameter controls the feedback of the output signal behind the Hall on the compressor input. The sign determines the polarity the feedback.

Main Outputs

Note :

Since the feedback signal is obtained from FX1, it is only effective if the FX1 MIx is actually turned up. Since the feedback signal after the Is tapped Hall, which is indeed reached via FX2, must logically FX2 signals included in the feedback loop.

4-18

Page 87 KS-32 user guide

Part 4 - Effects Hipass cutoff Area: 00 to 99 This parameter filters out low frequencies behind the distortion. Each higher the value, the less low frequencies pass through.

LOPASS cutoff Area: 00 to 99 This parameter filters out high frequencies behind the distortion. Each higher the value, the less high frequencies to pass.

4-19

Page 89 88 KS-32 user guide Part 5 - The Basics of sound programming

Part 5 - The Basics of sound programming

What is a sound? .................................................. ................................. 5 - 1 Voices and consistency ............................................... ......................... 5 - 1 Compare - About the Compare button / LED ......................................... .... 5-2 The Edit-Buffer.........................................................................................5 - 2 How to save new sounds ............................................. .................. 5 - 3 How to copy sounds .............................................. ............................ 5 - 4

What is a sound? The sounds of the KS-32 can be divided into two categories. Once the Default sounds , consisting of three voices (voices) and an effect , and secondly, the drum sounds from the 17 voices and effect exist. Drum sounds have some other program parameters, but but much more votes. Standard sounds and drum sounds each have their own Programming rules. More on this in Part 6 and 7 . In this part it is more to the general principles of both sound classes.

Voices and voices When we speak of the number of votes a single KS-32 sounds so has nothing to do with the voices (polyphony, so "you can so-and-so many tones play ") do. It is rather a question of the number of Voices that make up a played note. The KS-32 has a total of 32 votes, the dynamic between the different sounds are distributed. How many votes there for a individual sound consumed depends on two factors: 1) The number of voices available on the Select Voice Page ON ( Wave Bank, Screen 0 ). 2) Whether the keyboard ( Output Bank, Screen 1 ) or dynamic zones ( Output Bank, Screen 3 ) of the voices overlap or not. Many sounds come with one voice per key off in this case you can play 32 tones before the KS-32 somewhere a voice "Steals". Sounds that use two voices are still 16 voices playable. Sounds with three voices corresponding to 10 voices. Up to three Voices can be used in a standard sound. Drum sounds are basically unanimously, that is, they use a Voice per key. So Memorize: The KS-32 has a dynamic Stimmenzuweisolution - there are many ways to increase the number of votes and the To avoid occurrence of "voice stealing".

5-1

Page 90 Part 5 - The Basics of sound programming

KS-32 user guide

For example: â&#x20AC;˘ When a voice died away (be it because the end of the shaft has been reached, or because the envelope was completely run through is) she is back for a new tone available without a new voice to must be "stolen". More on this in Part 6 . â&#x20AC;˘ You can also determine if a voice low, medium, or to have high priority. So you can use the voice allocation make yourself. More on this in the section " Output Bank "in part. 6

Compare - About the Compare button / LED Once you have changed any sound parameters, the LED starts on the Edit Sound flashing button. It flashes to other one Select Sound, or save the modified sound. This is a automatic reminder that a sound has been changed. In order to hear the original, unchanged, simply press the Compare button. The Edit Sound LED stops flashing, and listen to

the original sound. The display also appear again the ancient Parameters. Press Compare again, you will hear your edited version of the sound.

The Edit Buffer You can also change a sound without losing the original because the modified version in a special buffer, called Edit Buffer is preserved. Every time you change a parameter, is transferred into the edit buffer this sound. What was there before, is deleted. There is always room for a sound - which previously in the buffer was, is gone. If the Compare button press, you switch between the sound in the edit buffer and its original in the main memory of the KS-32. The Sound in the Edit Buffer we call general Edit Sound . You can press the Compare button at this Edit Sound return, even if you have already played other sounds, as long as you change any parameters. Otherwise, the sound of the Edit Buffer. The rule of thumb is: The sound can be heard, the sound is the one edited. If you like the newly created sound, you should rename it and stored elsewhere. This procedure is described in "How to new sounds stores "explained in this section.

5-2

Page 91 KS-32 user guide

Part 5 - The Basics of sound programming

How to cancel edits If you do not like the outcome of your art of programming: Press the compare button so that the Edit Sound indicator lights solid lights up. Now you can start all over again. You lose the sound where you have worked before.

How to save new sounds After you have made a new sound, or an existing have edited the now rather suits your taste, you need Him save somewhere, so he also still available later. New Sounds can be in one of the 80 internal memories of the KS-32 be stored. Here's how: 1) Make sure that the Edit Sound LED flashes. If not, press the Compare button. Then you hear the edit buffer. 2) Press Enter • Save . Then do the KS-32 that you with the sound are done, and now want to save. The display shows: "Save Sound <SOUND NAME>? "The name of the sound with which you have begun to edit. 3) Use the cursor keys to select a max. 16-character name for your a new sound. The left / right cursor keys to select the place, the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor keys to select the letter or symbol. (With the data entry knob all the way down you get a Space. By the way, looks a sound name with dot, comma and dash clearer in the display.) 4) Press Enter • Save . 5) Search with the Bank and screen buttons to select a location for the new sound. The display shows the name of the current Sounds in memory. Find a sound that you no longer need, or

Did you somehow never really fallen. You can thank the Compare - Compare button, which you like best. 6) Do you have a preset location is found just press yet Enter • Save . The display will briefly "SAVED" before the display again changes to the last parameter.

Tip :

Do you want to perpetuate the altered sound in its original place, do this with a traditional double click on the Enter • Save- button. In the Display will show "SAVED", and then it happened.

5-3

Page 92 Part 5 - The Basics of sound programming

KS-32 user guide

How to copy sounds Sometimes it happens that a sound just by a Memory to be copied to another. Maybe you want Together their ten most important sounds on a bench. • Select the sound to be copied to. • Press Enter • Save . The display shows:

Replace

edit

sound? • Confirm with Up • Yes . The selected sound is now in the edit buffer. Now you can as described above, the sound elsewhere store.

5-4

Page 93 KS-32 user guide

Part 6 - standard sound programming

Part 6 - standard sound programming • This part covers all the functions independently in a default sound for each single voice can be edited. KS-32 standard sound structure .......................................... ..................... 6 - 2 Modulators ................................................. ............................................ 6 - 3 About modulation ................................................ ............................. 6 - 3 Selecting a modulator ............................................... ................ 6 - 3 Modulation Amount - yes or no modulation ............................. 6 - 4 Modulation sources ................................................. ....................... 6 - 4 The Sound Edit mode ............................................ .................................. 6 - 8 Wave-Bank...............................................................................................6 - 8 Select VOICE / Voice Status ............................................. ............... 6 - 9 Wave-class ............................................... .................................... 6 - 10 Individual Waves ............................................... ........................... 6-12 Delay time ............................................... ...................................... 6-13 Home Index ............................................... ..................................... 6-13 Loop Length ............................................... .................................. 6 - 14 Voice Restrike Decay Time ........................................... .............. 6 - 14 Change sound mode ............................................. ....................... 6 - 14 Pitch Bank ............................................... ............................................... 6 - 15 Oct.................................................................................................6 - 15 Env1 ................................................. ............................................. 6 - 15 Mod Source ............................................... ................................... 6-16 Keyboard Pitch tracking ............................................. ................ 6-16 Glide ................................................. ............................................ 6-16 ENV 1, ENV 2, AMP (Envelope 3) - The KS-32 envelope ............. 6-18 Levl - Level ............................................... ................................. 6-19 Time ................................................. ............................................. 6-20 Levv - Dynamic Level Control .......................................... 6-21 Fashion - (ENV 1 and ENV 2) ......................................... ............. 6-22 MODE (AMP) - Parts trigger .......................................... ..6 - 22 KeyboardTrk - keyboard control .............................................. 6 - 23 Select Defaults ............................................... ............................... 6-24 The LFO Bank .............................................. .......................................... 6-25 LFO speed ............................................... ..................................... 6-25 Noise-rate ............................................... ..................................... 6-25 Level - Level LFO .............................................. ........................ 6-26 Wave ................................................. ............................................ 6-26 The filter bank .............................................. ......................................... 6-28 Filter1 - Filter-1 mode ........................................... .................... 6-28 Filter configurations ............................................... ................... 6-29 FC1 cutoff - Filter-1 cutoff frequency ...................................... 6 - 30 FC1 keyboard ............................................... ............................... 6-30 Mod Sourc ............................................... ..................................... 6-30 FC2 cutoff - Filter-2 cutoff frequency ...................................... 6 - 31 FC2 keyboard ............................................... ............................... 6-31 The Env2 and amp benches ............................................ ......................... 6-31 The output Bank .............................................. ...................................... 6-32 Volume - Voice volume ............................................. ........... 6-32 Mod Source - Volume modulator ......................................... 6 - 32 KeybdScale - Keyboard-scale intensity (or zone) ............... 6-33 Output bus ............................................... ..................................... 6-33 Pan - Pan position ............................................... ................ 6-34

6-1

Page 94 Part 6 - standard sound programming

KS-32 user guide

KS-32 standard sound structure Each of the three parts of a standard sound consists of: • a digital oscillator, one of 167 waveforms from the KS-32 Wellenformstpeicher happening • Two multi-mode digital filters • an LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) • three complex envelopes for volume, pitch and filter etc. • a versatile modulation matrix with 15 possible

Modulation sources. The diagram shows the structure of KS-32 voice.

KS-32 Parts Construction

Envelope parameters Levels: Attack, Peak, Break, sustain Times: Attack, Decay1 / 2, Release Velocity curve Velocity curves QUIKRISE Keyboard tracking Velocity control of Attack and Level CONVEX LINEAR Envelope Mode (Normal / finish / repeat) CONCAVE

Modulation sources LFO Timbral ENV 1 PEDAL ENV 2 PITCH AMP WHEEL Noise1 WHL + PR Noise2 PRESSR VELOC MAX ON KEYBD XCTRL

ENV 1

Bend Range

Env 1 Mod Office

ENV 2

2 F1: Env Office Cut Kbd off Office

SemiFine Octavetone tune Wave Mod

F2:

AMP

Env 2 Office

CutKbd off Office

Filter Type: F1 F2

Voice Output Volume (AMP amt.) L

Wave Delay Digital

Oscillator

LFO Office

LFO Fashion Delay LFO Level

Pitch LFO Wave Mod TRIANGLE Office SINE SINE / TRI POS / SINE POS / TRI SAWTOOTH Pitch SQUARE Mod Source Rate

Noise Src Rate Noise Noise1 Source Noise2

Boost

Digital Filters ON OFF Fc1 Mod F1 Mod -> F c2 Office F1 Mod Source

Amplifier

Pan Position Volume Mod Office

Volume Mod Source

LFO Level Mod Source

6-2

Page 95 KS-32 user guide

Part 6 - standard sound programming

Modulators About modulation Something modulating means nothing more than to change its value. Within a voice of the KS-32 sound programming starts by , that we for the pitch parameter, tone, and volume Set Default to this then most diverse in style and Way to modulate the sound will be dynamic and alive. Suppose you turn your stereo system and turn the Volume to halfway. Then we could the manual volume Setting call. Now imagine, turn the volume controller alternately up and down again, so that the volume always and down to and decreases again. Then you could in other words, say you modulate the volume of your system. Would you recommend the Take treble controls, a tone modulation would be the result. Many parameters of the KS-32 is modulated in a similar way (Though less random). There are 16 different modulation sources. Each can independently a certain sound parameters of the KS-32 be assigned, including some interesting effect parameters.

Selecting a modulator On the screens on which a modulation source can be selected can, the display shows "Mod = _________" (short for Modulation

can, the display shows "Mod = _________" (short for Modulation Source). With the Data Entry knob or the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor the modulation source is now selected. Take for example the pitch modulation screen, where the pitch a voice can be modulated. Press Edit sound to the Sound Edit Mode to come. Then press the Pitch button ( Bank 1) and 1 screen . In addition to Envelope 1 (Envelope 1) and the LFO, the always available, yet an additional modulator for Pitch can be selected: Env1 = -99 = -99 LFO Mod LFO

Modulation source

* +99

Intensity modulation

6-3

Page 96 Part 6 - standard sound programming

KS-32 user guide

Modulation Amount - Modulation: Yes or No As seen above, the value is to the right of the modulation source its intensity modulation on. This determines how much the Modulator is to act on the selected parameter. Select the parameter "LFO = XX.". Now imagine the DataEntry control the value. Which can be positive or negative. The +00 Value has the same effect as if the modulator would be switched off.

Tip :

For the modulation intensity, as for all parameters, with a mean of +00, there is a simple action to achieve this value. If you have selected the value, press the Down • No cursor , then the Up • Yes-cursor to it, and release both at the same time. Then the value automatically jumps to +00.

Modulation sources These are the 16 different modulation sources of KS-32: • LFO - Low Frequency Oscillator • timbral - Timbre knob • ENV 1 - Envelope 1 • PEDAL - foot pedal • ENV 2 - Envelope 2 • PITCH - Pitch bend wheel • AMP - Envelope 3 • WHEEL - Modulation • NOISE 1 - 1 noise generator • WHL + PR - Mod Wheel &. Aftertouch • NOISE 2 - Noise Generator 2 • PRESSR - Aftertouch • VELOC - Velocity • MAX ON - Full modulation • KEYBD - keyboard - control • XCTRL - Remote Controller (MIDI)

LFO - Low Frequency Oscillator The low-frequency oscillator generates oscillations with very low Frequency below the threshold of hearing with which vibrato, tremolo, and can produce many other effects - depending on the selected waveform (it are 7 different). A detailed description of the LFO follows corresponding section of this part.

ENV 1, ENV 2, AMP (Envelope 3) The KS-32 complex has three envelopes. With envelope time-dependent modulation of volume, pitch or timbre generated. • ENV-1 is fixed to the pitch of the voice, but can also

Elsewhere be used. â&#x20AC;˘ ENV-2 is firmly connected to the filter of the voice, but can also Elsewhere be used. â&#x20AC;˘ AMP is a special case. The AMP Envelope always controls the volume or amplitude and can only be used there. A detailed treatment of the envelopes of the KS-32 later in this Part.

6-4

Page 97 KS-32 user guide

Part 6 - standard sound programming

NOISE 1 - Rasterized noise generator The noise generator generates a random control voltage. On the Defined pitch, extreme "computer typical" can generate effects be. With slight modulation (around +02 to + 04) one gets subtle Changes in pitch that enhances the sound more lively.

NOISE 1 +100 0 -100 Noise rate

NOISE 2 - Soft Noise Generator This second noise generator uses the same scheme as the first, only with a smoothed waveform. The generated on the pitch based, "siren-like" effects. The figure shows the differences between the two noise generators.

NOISE 2 +100 0 -100 Noise rate

VELOC - Velocity The velocity (velocity) is the strength, pressed a button with the will. Select VELOC as a modulator, you can by the parameter control your playing strength. (If only positive values)

6-5

Page 98

Part 6 - standard sound programming

KS-32 user guide

KEYBD - keyboard voltage Here, the position is used on the keyboard as a modulation source. The range of values over the entire MIDI keyboard range: +100 +50 0 -50 -100

KS-32 keyboard 88-key piano keyboard MIDI note numbers 0-127 As the figure shows, the modulator KEYBD can have both positive and have negative values. Starting from middle C (C4, MIDI Note number # 60) of the modulated parameter is lowered down and lifted up. With negative modulation intensity is the exactly the opposite.

Timbral - Timbre control This is again a ENSONIQ -Spezialität: can timbral as any other modulator can be used anywhere. The timbre parameters under Edit Track, Screen 8 regulates the timbral intensity. With timbral, the corresponding value on the data entry control are controlled. Good for Live Peformance.

PEDAL - voltage control foot pedal Here, the additional CVP-1 foot pedal is used as a modulator. The Effect is the same as in the modulation wheel. It can be used anywhere be. Remember, though, that the pedal only as a modulator works when under System • MIDI, Screen 3 for the pedal "Pedal = Mod # 4." Has been eigestellt. Otherwise, the pedal controls only the Volume. More on this in Part 3 - System • MIDI settings.

PITCH - Pitch bend wheel Here, the pitch bend wheel is addressed. This wheel can next to the Pitch shift also carry out other functions as a modulator. Does it, for example, the filter cutoff frequency, the sound is brighter when the wheel is moved upward, or even softer when it rotates downward (with a negative index, it acts vice versa).

6-6

Page 99 KS-32 user guide

Part 6 - standard sound programming

WHEEL - The Modulation The Modulation left of the keyboard can be anywhere as a modulator use. To use it to control the vibrato, it must be the LFO be associated with the modulation intensity must be 0. The Effect is positive. The effect is stronger when the wheel by itself move away. With inverted index it works the other way around.

WHL + PR - Modulation and aftertouch This double modulation source allows the simultaneous modulating with modulation wheel and aftertouch.

PRESSR - Aftertouch Aftertouch a modulator that certain parameters is by the strength of Control button is pressed after the attack.

If you play on the keyboard of the KS-32, press the keys Hold, again vigorously after to trigger the effect. After Touch is available in two versions-Poly-Key ™ as ENSONIQ -Spezialität (polyphonic aftertouch) acting on each button independently, and Channel Aftertouch (monophonic aftertouch), held for all Keys simultaneously acts. The KS-32 can both types via MIDI receive and process. The own keyboard sends channel aftertouch. Remember that all sounds are programmed only in accordance with must be able to receive aftertouch. Has no aftertouch Effect is simply not been allocated accordingly. Aftertouch as a modulator there are only positive values, because in negative values, the level would verrringert.

MAX ON - Full modulation MAX ON sets the full modulation intensity for the corresponding Parameters. This can be useful for example in drum sounds to regardless of the dynamics always have full volume. MAX ON can be used positively or negatively, depending on the programmed Intensity.

XCTRL - Remote Controller (via MIDI) An external controller such. As a breath controller, the MIDI emis pfangen, can also be used to modulate the KS-32. In the System • MIDI mode is to the appropriate controller number set.

6-7

Page 100 Part 6 - standard sound programming

KS-32 user guide

You must KS-32 does not play by a different keyboard to enter Come to benefit from a Breath Controller (Breath); 1) Vebinden the MIDI Out of the instrument with the in the KS-32; 2) Make sure that both controllers are active ( System • MIDI, Screen 7 ); 3) Select the breath controller as an external controller of the KS-32 (XCTRL = 02, and System • MIDI, Screen 7 ). 4) Select the LFO modulator or filter cutoff, etc. XCTRL so as appropriate section of the manual. 5) Play the sound of the KS-32 keyboard while in the Breath Controller blow. The modulation has the same effect as if you play on the external instrument.

The Sound Edit mode Whenever you want to change a sound, you have the KS-32 first place on the Sound Edit mode. This is done by selecting the Edit Sound button. Then you can adjust the sound according to your parameters Change ideas. The Sound Edit mode parameters are eight banks distributed. Each Bank contains a series of screens , which in turn one or more Can contain parameters. Each screen in the Sound Edit mode has a two-digit Screen address .

Note:

The Wave Bank Screen addresses change depending on the Waveform class and the specific parameters in each class. More about Screen addresses in Part 2 - Overview.

Wave Bank Every voice (Voice) KS-32 is one of 168 waveforms from his Memory again. These waves are the "raw material" from which a sound

is established. In the Wave -Bank can select which of Wave the currently selected voice to be played. In addition, many Playback parameters can be changed for this wave.

Select Voice / Voice Status Wave Bank Press Edit Sound / Wave (bank 0) / Screen 0th Select Voice Select Voice: ONE ON

Voice status values

6-8

Page 101 KS-32 user guide

Part 6 - standard sound programming The first screen of the Wave Bank has three functions: whether one or all Voices are to be edited, which is edited (if only one been selected) and the respective playback status.

Select Voice This parameter determines whether one or all voices of a sound editing should be. • ONE - A single voice is edited. What that determines the Voice status parameter, which will be described below. • ALL - All Voices in a sound are active and at the same time edited. ALL is selected, the KS-32 is located in the Group Edit mode . Parameter changes then automatically act for all the voices. When you the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor keys for data entry at SelectVOICE = ALL use the values of various voices change relative to each other, instead of the value shown in the display.

Voice Status The three values at the bottom of the oscillator screen is called general Voice status parameters. The values correspond to the three voices of KS 32 sounds. The parameter is used to determine which voices to be edited (if Select Voice is set to ONE) and which Playback status of each voice. One Voice is selected, this parameter for editing. Then flashes the voice status parameters. From that moment on, any acts Edit this voice. There are three status options for each voice: • OFF - The selected voice is muted and does not decay with. • ON - The Voice is on and is played. • SOLO - The Voice is on, while all others are muted, so you can listen to parameter changes better.

Note : The Voice, the status value is flashing, the Voice for editing is selected.

6-9

Page 102 Part 6 - standard sound programming 01

KS-32 user guide

Wave Class / Individual Wave Wave Bank Press Edit Sound / Wave (bank 0) / Screen. 1 Waveform-class

Wave = STRING WAVE STRING ENSEMBLE

Single waveform

Wave Class This parameter determines the waveform class, intended for a Voice is used. Have you selected this parameter, you can use the Data Entry knob or the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons to quickly scroll through the different waveform types. Then you go on the waveform name to the exact wave within the class pick. Each time the class is changed Wave appear the respective first Wave in the display and all associated wave Bank, Screen 3 parameters be changed accordingly. The KS-32 distinguishes between 13 different categories, or Wave - Classes : These classes include samples of acoustic and electronic Sounds that serve as the basis for many realistic sounds. If necessary, these waves multisamples (of different stand points of Tonumfanges resampled) for an authentic reproduction of the original sound. • STRING-WAVE -samples of stringed instruments - strings, pianos, Guitars etc. • BRASS-WAVE - Samples of wind instruments - Horn, Saxophone, etc. • BASS WAVE - A selection of bass sounds - electric bass, contrabass, Synth basses, etc. • BREATH WAVE - flute and choir samples with plenty of breath. • TUNED PERC - Here you will find a lot of sounds, all with percussive loops (Ie, they sound as long as a key is pressed.) • PERCUSSION - This class contains ungeloopte (short) percussion Sounds • DRUM-WAVE - Single drum sounds for new drum kits. Read more in part. 6 • 16-BIT PIANO - Samples of pianos and piano attacks in 16-bit Resolution.

6 - 10

Page 103 KS-32 user guide

Part 6 - standard sound programming • EXPANSION - A wide range of sounds - strings, Horns, bass, Breath, Percussion, Pianos, etc. The next four classes contain a lot of sampled and algorithmically generated Waves with more synth character:

• WAVE FORM - A waveform is a simple waveform with only a period which is always repeated. The KS-32 has both sampled as synthetic waveforms. With sawtooth and square can all the classic analog sounds can be realized. • inharmonic - inharmonic loops are the very Waveforms similarly, except that they consist of several periods, and may contain inharmonic overtones. • TRANSWAVE - Trans-Wave ™ is a special group of waves, the it only ENSONIQ are. Each Transwave consists of many individual Waveforms with different spectrum, to form a chain have been linked. With different parameters can be determine from where and how this wavetable is to be played, what the Sound makes very much alive. • MULTI-WAVE - Contains only a single waveform, but from composed all of the first 10 Waves waveform classes of the KS-32 is. Starting with an arbitrary wave, any desired number play of waves, forward or backward. This means that Effects and "Jam Loops" possible. A loop length of 001 plays a single waveform from, whereas a loop length of 126 all Waveforms representing. The default is 000, which is also all Waveforms correspond.

6-11

Page 104 Part 6 - standard sound programming

KS-32 user guide

Individual Waves Here the actual wave is selected. Flashes of these parameters can with the data entry control to select from the waves of this class. With the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor the class can be changed. Below you can see a complete list of all 167 KS-32 waveforms. The Wave-class is shown in bold above.

STRING WAVE:

PERCUSSION:

WAVEFORM:

STRING ENSEMBLE PIZZICATO STRING GRAND PIANO PIANO VARIATION DIGITAL PIANO CLAVINET PIANO ACOUSTIC GUITAR GTR VARIATION 1 GTR VARIATION 2 GUITAR-HARMONIC ELECTRIC GUITAR PLUCKED GUITAR CHUKKA GUITAR

WOODEN HIT WOODBLOCK TEMPLE BLOCK CLAVES TIMBALE BONGOS AGOGO-BELL COWBELL TAMBOURINE FINGERSNAPS CLAPS DINKY HIT TOY HAMMER SLINKY POP MUSICIAN'S TAPE STEAM DRUM BIG BLAST SPRAY CAN

ORGAN VARIATION1 ORGAN VARIATION2 ORGAN VARIATION3 ORGAN VARIATION4 SAWTOOTH SQUARE SINE TRIANGLE 1 + 2 HARMONICS 2 HARMONIC SAW DIGITAL PNO GRIT DIGITAL PNO TINE BUBBAWAVE CLAVINET CLAV VARIATION WOODWIND WWIND VARIATION PIPE ORGAN

BRASS WAVE: BRASS ENSEMBLE TRUMPET SOLO TRUMP VARIATION

16BIT PIANO: 16 BIT PIANO 16 BIT PIANO HI 16 BIT PIANO-LO THUD

EXPANSION: VIOLA SECT SOLO VIOLIN NYLON GUITAR HARP SHAMIZEN ELEC PIANO 1 ELEC PIANO 2 PERC ORGAN TRUMPET MUTE SOPRANO SAX ACCORDIAN FRETLES BASS SLAP BASS SYNTH BASS 3

TRUMP VARIATION SAXOPHONE SAX VARIATION 1 VARIATION 2

SPRAY CAN PIPE ORGAN METALLIC DINK BRASS ORGAN VOCAL PERCUSSION VOCAL BELL ANVIL-HIT SYNTH BELL SYNTH THUMP CLARINET

BASS WAVE: PICKED BASS THUMB POP BASS PLUCKED BASS ACOUSTIC BASS SYNTH BASS 1 SYNTH BASS 2

BREATH WAVE: WOOD FLUTE Chiff FLUTE VOX oohs VOCAL ENSEMBLE

TUNED PERC: MARIMBA KALIMBA STEEL DRUM DOORBELL POTLID HIT SYNTH PLUCK PLINK HORN PIANO PING ORCHESTRA HIT RACK-BELL

DRUM WAVE: DYNAMIC KICK GATED KICK ROOM KICK ELECTRIC KICK TIGHT KICK THUMP KICK THUMP SNARE SYNTH SNARE ROOM SNARE BRUSHED SNARE RIMSHOT SNARE SIDE STICK SNARE DRY LOW TOM TOM DRY HIGH ROOM TOM LOW TOM ROOM HIGH CLOSED HI-HAT 1 CLOSED HI-HAT 2 SYNTH HAS CLOSED PEDAL HI-HAT OPEN HI-HAT RIDE CYMBAL CRASH CYMBAL

Inharmonic: TRIANGLE LOOP ANVIL LOOP CLUSTER LOOP TUBULAR LOOP NOISE LOOP

TRANSWAVE: FORMANT X PLANET-X ELECTRO-X PULSE 1-X PULSE 2-X RESONANT 1-X RESONANT 2-X RESONANT 3-X RESONANT 4-X

MULTI-WAVE: ALL WAVES

SYNTH BASS 3 CHOIR SHAKUHACHI TIMPANI VIBES AGOGO BELL-2 SHEKERE TAIKO TAIKO RM WHISTLE SHAKER CONGA SLAP TRIANGLE CASTANETS Hyoshigi SYNTH KISS SYN COWBELL SYN RIMSHOT VOCAL AAH VOCAL UNH VOCAL UHH VOCAL TEH KICK DANCE ENKA KICK LONG RAP KIK DANCE SNARE HIPHOP KICK1 HIPHOP KICK2 HIPHOP SNARE FULL PIPEORG

6-12

Page 105 KS-32 user guide

Part 6 - standard sound programming

Delay Time / Direction Wave Bank Press Edit Sound / Wave (bank 0) / Screen. 2

Delay time The parameters for the delay time is the time after the key Stop until the actual sound starts. The control range is 000 to 250 in 4 millisecond increments. This means that delays of more possible than a second.

Initiating a voice when the key is released - The highest value for Delay is KEYUP. That is, the tuner only sounds when the button is released.

Direction of play This parameter determines whether the waveform forward or backward to be played. Waves from the TRANSWAVE, WAVEFORM and inharmonic Classes based on loops and therefore have a fixed direction of play. If one of these waveforms is active, the Direction parameter does not appear.

Home Index / Mod Source and Amount (Loop Length) Wave Bank Press Edit Sound / Wave (bank 0) / Screen. 3

Start Index = 00 Mod = VEL

Modulation source

* +00

Intensity

Start Index = 00 Loop Length = 000

Loop length

Home Index Here the starting point of the sample is adjusted. If START = 00, the Sample played completely. Increasing the value will be more and more cut off from the beginning of the sample. This can be, for example, the

Cut typical approach of a sample, just the looping part of looped (standing) sounds to use. Range: 00 to 99

Mod Source The modulation source. Here you determine which of the 15 modulators to modulate the starting point. Each modulator is used.

6-13

Page 106 Part 6 - standard sound programming

KS-32 user guide

Mod Amount The modulation intensity determines how much of the above selected modulator will affect the waveform. If this value is +00, the starting point is unchanged. Positive values move it forward, ie away from the beginning. Negative values move the starting point back to the beginning of the sample. Both Parameter does not exist for inharmonic, and WAVEFORM MULTI WAVE. Range: -99 to +99

Loop Length Specifies the number of waves within the loop. There's only MULTI-WAVE. Range: 000-121

Note:

Two waveform classes, inharmonic and WAVEFORM have to This screen no parameters. Program a voice with these Welenformen, the screen will be skipped.

Voice Restrike Decay Time Wave Bank Press Edit Sound / Wave (bank 0) / Screen. 4

Voice Restrike Decay Time This parameter determines how long a sound decays after it again has been struck. Range: 00 to 99

Change Sound Mode Wave Bank Press Edit Sound / Wave (bank 0) / Screen. 5

Change sound mode With Enter • Save to switch the sound mode here. Work in Standard sound mode, switch so in the drum sound mode, and the corresponding basic settings are called.

6-14

Page 107 KS-32 user guide

Part 6 - standard sound programming

Pitch Bank In the pitch-bank the basic settings for the pitch to the Voice adjusted and programmed the modulation sources for pitch.

Oct / Semi / Fine (Oscillator Tune) Pitch Bank Press Edit Sound / Pitch (Bank 1) / Screen 0th

Oct Changes the pitch in octave steps. Range: -4 to +4 octaves

Semi Changes the pitch in semitone steps. Increase or decrease this value by more than +11 or -11, the octave is to automatically increased or decreased one step.

Fine Changes the pitch in cent increments. (One cent is 1/100 semitone). Range: -99 to +99

Env1 / LFO / Mod Source and Amount Pitch Bank Press Edit Sound / Pitch (Bank 1) / Screen. 1

Env1 = -99 = -99 LFO Mod LFO

Modulation source

* +99

Intensity modulation

On the Pitch Mod screen pitch is modulated. Envelope 1 and LFO can be here always use, while an additional modulator can be chosen freely.

Env1 Envelope 1 - Determines how much the first envelope on the pitch should work. Range: -99 to +99

6 - 15

Page 108 Part 6 - standard sound programming

KS-32 user guide

LFO Modulation intensity of the low-frequency oscillator - The LFO mostly used for vibrato, but may have different effects produce, depending on the waveform used. Range: -99 to +99

Mod Source The modulation source - Here you can select an additional 15 Modulators for the pitch.

Mod Amount

The Depth - determines how much of the modulator on the Is to act pitch. Range: -99 to +99

Keyboard Pitch Tracking Pitch Bank Press Edit Sound / Pitch (Bank 1) / Screen. 2

Keyboard Pitch Tracking Determines whether the pitch of the voice is affected by the keyboard, or should stand firmly on C 4. • ON - The pitch is controlled by the keyboard. • OFF - All buttons have the same pitch (C4) when the oscillator Tune parameter was not changed. If it is, the pitch would be the Voice sound transposed to the value on the Oscillator Tune Has been set screen.

Glide / Glide Time Pitch Bank Press Edit Sound / Pitch (Bank 1) / Screen. 3

Glide Enables the glide (portamento) and various types of monophonic Voice allocation. However, the time is for all three voices of fashion individually. There are four Glide Modes: • OFF - no effect. This is normal, polyphonic playing without Portamento. • RETRIGGER - In this mode, the voice is monophonic, with the envelopes of the voice with each note you play again be played forward. As with LEGATO mode below the glide occurs Effect only when tied notes. • MINI - Similar to the mono mode with analog synthesizers. The Voice is only monophonic and Portamento always active (Assuming that Glide time is higher than 0). If you simply want monophonic play without portamento, turn the Glide

6-16

Page 109 KS-32 user guide

Note:

Part 6 - standard sound programming Mode to "MINI-MODE" and the glide time to 0. In contrast to the Fashion RETRIGGER be played only on the envelopes staccato Notes replayed from the beginning. • LEGATO - Here Portamento only occurs when playing legato manner (Bound) on. Play unbound notes, you do not have a Portamento. In contrast to RETRIGGER mode, the Envelopes played only in staccato style of play from the beginning. The RETRIGGER, MINI and LEGATO modes have a kind of "Touch Memory" - Get a button, while another still is kept jumping or sliding the pitch to this sound. With pressed sustain pedal is released, this function dynamically.

Glide Time Specifies the time in which the pitch glides from one note to another. Range: 00 to 99 (the higher the value, the longer the time)

6-17

Page 110 Part 6 - standard sound programming

KS-32 user guide

ENV 1, ENV 2, AMP (Envelope 3) - The KS-32 envelopes An envelope (Envelope) is a trajectory, according to which a changed to any value or parameter over a specific time. This Envelopes are already automatically pitch, timbre and Associated volume, although ENV 1 and ENV 2 for other purposes can be used. • ENV 1 is associated with the pitch of the voice. On the Pitch Mod Screen there is an extra parameter for the modulation by ENV. 1 • ENV 2 is connected to the filter frequency of the voice. For each of the There are two filters a parameter ENV 2 = ____ in the filter - bank, which controls the strength of the timbre modulation. • AMP is firmly connected to the volume of the voice. The AMP envelope always controls the output volume of the voice. All other Volume modulations in the output - Bank before the envelope used. The envelopes of the KS-32 are connected to the common ADSR envelopes ajar, but with many improvements. While the ADSR Envelope gets along with three adjustable times and a level that has the KS-32 envelope four times and four levels. The illustration shows the structure of a KS-32 envelope: ATTACK DECAY 1DECAY 2 99

KEY HERO

RELEASE

PEAK BREAK POINT SUSTAIN

LEVEL INITIAL 0 KEY DOWN

TIME

KEY UP

6-18

Page 111 KS-32 user guide

Part 6 - standard sound programming

Levl / Time Env1 Bank

Press Edit Sound / Env1 (Bank 2) / Screen 0th

Initial Peak

BreakfastSustain

Levl = 99 99 99 99 Time = 99 99 99 99

Attack Decay1 Decay2 Release

Levl - Level This parameter sets the levels of the four envelope levels. The four values correspond to the following levels:

INITIAL This is the level at which the envelope starts. Range: 00 to 99

PEAK Determines the level which the envelope after the ATTACK time reached. Range: 00 to 99

BREAK POINT Determines the level after the time of DECAY. 1 Range: 00 to 99

SUSTAIN Determines the level of the end of DECAY 2 and is also the Level at which the note is held while the button is pressed. Range: 00 to 99

6-19

Page 112 Part 6 - standard sound programming

KS-32 user guide

Time Here, the values â&#x20AC;&#x2039;for the four time segments of the envelope entered. Note that times are meant here and not

Intensities. That said, here it is always about a fixed time of a Level to the next, no matter how high the level.

ATTACK This is the time between INITIAL and PEAK, ie from Keystroke to the second level. The higher the value, the longer the Time. It must here be not necessarily the attack because the INITIAL level also may well be higher than the PEAK exactly what additional Decay stage would result. Range: 00 to 99 (the times are given in the table below).

DECAY 1 The time it takes for the envelope of PEAK to BREAK. Range: 00 to 99

DECAY 2 The time it takes for the envelope of BREAK to SUSTAIN. Range: 00 to 99

RELEASE This defines the time it takes for the sound after the key is released, to the level of SUSTAIN to come back to zero. Range: 00 to 99

Value 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

ENVELOPE TIMES Time Time Time (In seconds) Value (In seconds) Value (In seconds) Value .00 20 .20 40 .82 60 .01 21 .22 41 .88 61 .02 22 .23 42 .94 62 .03 23 .25 43 1.0 63 .04 24 .27 44 1.0 64 .06 25 .29 45 1.1 65 .07 26 .31 46 1.2 66 .08 27 .33 47 1.3 67 .08 28 .35 48 1.4 68 .09 29 .38 49 1.5 69 .10 30 .41 50 1.6 70 .11 31 .44 51 1.7 71 .11 32 .47 52 1.8 72 .12 33 .50 53 2.0 73 .13 34 .54 54 2.1 74 .14 35 .58 55 2.3 75 .15 36 .62 56 2.4 76 .16 37 .66 57 2.6 77 .17 38 .71 58 2.8 78 .19 39 .76 59 3.0 79

Time Time Value (In seconds) (In seconds) 3.2 80 13 3.5 81 14 3.7 82 15 4.0 83 16 4.3 84 17 4.6 85 18 4.9 86 19 5.3 87 21 5.7 88 22 6.1 89 24 6.5 90 26 7.0 91 28 7.5 92 30 8.1 93 32 8.6 94 34 9.3 95 37 9.9 96 39 10 97 42 11 98 45 12 99 49

6-20

Page 113 KS-32 user guide 21

Part 6 - standard sound programming

Levv / AtckV / VelCurv Env1 Bank Press Edit Sound / Env1 (Bank 2) / Screen. 1

Levv - Dynamic Level Control This parameter lowers all levels at lower velocity. The means that the values â&#x20AC;&#x2039;for INITIAL, PEAK, BREAK and SUSTAIN are Peak values, and can be achieved only in a heavy attack. "Levv" So regulates the amount of gain-reduction at low momentum. With this Parameter to have a continuous dynamic control of all four Level, depending on the velocity. With the different dynamics curves (VelCurv) can be further refined it. Range: 00 to 99

AtckV - Dynamic control of the attack time Thus, the attack time is controlled by the velocity. If the Value for "AtckV" increases, the attack time with increasing momentum is getting shorter. In "AtckV = 00", this parameter has no effect.

Range: 00 to 99

VelCurv - dynamic curve Here you can choose between four different dynamic curves when the dynamic control (levv) described above is active. The choices are: QUIKRISE, CONVEX, LINEAR, and CONCAVE. The graph below shows the input / output characteristics with the stop Dynamics on the X-axis (from eft to right) and the corresponding Output value on the Y-axis (from the bottom up).

50 0 50 100 0 0 QUICKRISE

50 0 50 100 0 CONVEX

50 0 50 100 LINEAR

50 CONCAVE

6-21

Page 114 Part 6 - standard sound programming 22

KS-32 user guide

Fashion / KeyboardTrk Env1 Bank Press Edit Sound / Env1 (Bank 2) / Screen. 2

Fashion - (ENV 1 and ENV 2) • NORMAL - The envelope is passed to the diagram. After releasing the button uses the RELEASE time until the sound has sustained. • FINISH - The envelope runs once completely, no matter when the button is released. The SUSTAIN stage is skipped. After DECAY 2 is over, the envelope goes directly into their RELEASE phase about. This is good for percussion sounds, if any sound the same To have curve, no matter how long the button is held. • REPEAT - In this mode, after DECAY 2 instead of SUSTAIN phase directly played over again and again. Shall the key is released, the envelope goes directly to the RELEASE phase about. With this mode, complex, rhythmic effects produce.

MODE (AMP) - Voice Trigger Because the AMP envelope controls the volume, should consider a few things be considered when working with the different play-styles is: In NORMAL mode: If a high delay time set for the Wave been ( Wave Bank, Screen 2 ), and sometimes let go of the button before this has elapsed, no sound will be heard even when the sustain pedal is pressed. In FINISH mode: here a delay time is programmed, the sound comes anyway, even if the key has already been released. In REPEAT mode: The waveform for each repetition again played from the beginning. From the SUSTAIN level, it goes directly to the INITIAL Level back.

Distribution of votes

In order to optimize the distribution of the 32 voices of the KS-32, and To avoid unwanted "stealing" of voices, one should understand have when the KS-32 uses a voice, and when she again Back "in the pot" does, so it can be used elsewhere. The results from the combination of fashion and envelope waveform Type.

6-22

Page 115 KS-32 user guide

Part 6 - standard sound programming A looped (standing) wave uses a voice until the Envelope reaches zero. For such a wave in the NORMAL or REPEAT mode: 99

= Envelope = Waveform data

AMP envelope

PEAK

BREAK SUSTAIN Voice is occupied INITIAL 0

VOICE IS FREE IF THE ENVELOPE HAS REACHED ZERO Looped Voice

TASTE PRESSED

TASTE Released

Or Emvelope mode FINISH: AMP envelope

PEAK

= Envelope = Waveform data

BREAK Voice is occupied INITIAL 0

VOICE IS SOON RELEASED THE ENVELOPE ON NULL, EVEN THE KEY IN IF COMPRESSED Looped Voice

TASTE PRESSED

SUSTAIN =TASTE 0 Released

Applies to ungeloopte Waves: The voice is free iff the whole sample is played, regardless of the level at which the envelope is just: AMP envelope

= Envelope = Wave data

PEAK BREAK

SUSTAIN

Voice is occupied INITIAL 0 TASTE PRESSED

VOICE IS FREE INDEPENDENT FROM ENVELOPE "Percussion" sound

TASTE Released

KeyboardTrk - keyboard control Changed the times of the envelope depends on the position of the played note on the keyboard. Increasing the value for Keyboard Trk all times shorter the higher played by middle C, and so it longer if you continue plays below. The higher the value of this parameter, the greater the Time differences between the highest and lowest key.

6-23

Page 116 Part 6 - standard sound programming

KS-32 user guide

The mean C thus remains always constant at the same value and not affected by this parameter. Range: -98 to +98

Select Defaults Env1 Bank Press Edit Sounds / Env1 (Bank 2) / Screen. 3

Select Defaults If you enter • Save push button appear 17 different "Preset" envelopes which are used in the current envelope can. This preset envelopes are: • FULL ON • ALL ZEROS • FULL VELRNG • SLOW STRING • PIANO DECAY • PERCUSSION

• RAMP UP • RAMP DOWN • SHORT BLIP • BRASS FILTER • REPEAT TRI • REPEAT RAMP

• WIND PITCH • BASIC PAD • AMP BLIP • TRANSIENT • SLOW LFO • SLOW LFO

This envelope values are particularly useful as a starting point when you want to create new sounds. After selecting an envelope shape, press again Enter • Save to place this in the voice.

6-24

Page 117 KS-32 user guide

Part 6 - standard sound programming

The LFO Bank The LFO bank contains all the parameters for the low-frequency oscillator . are Each voice of the KS-32 has its own LFO that as everywhere Modulator can be used where periodic modulations are desired. Usually used for effects such as vibrato LFO or tremolo.

LFO speed / noise rate LFO Bank Press Edit Sound / LFO (Bank 3) / Screen 0th

LFO Speed Adjusts the speed of the LFO modulation. Range: 00 to 99 The table below shows the frequency (in Hertz) for each value: Freq Value (In Hz) 00 .00 01 .05 02 .06 03 .06 04 .06 05 .07 06 .07 07 .08 08 .08 09 .09 10 .10 11 .11 12 .13 13 .14 14 .17 15 .20 16 .25 17 .33 18 .50 19 1.0

LFO FREQUENCIES Freq Freq Value (In Hz) Value (In Hz) value 20 1.25 40 6.25 60 21 1:50 41 6:50 61 22 1.75 42 6.75 62 23 2:00 43 7:00 63 24 2.25 44 7.25 64 25 2:50 45 7:50 65 26 2.75 46 7.75 66 27 3:00 47 8:00 67 28 3.25 48 8.25 68 29 3:50 49 8:50 69 30 3.75 50 8.75 70 31 4:00 51 9:00 71 32 4.25 52 9.25 72 33 4:50 53 9:50 73 34 4.75 54 9.75 74 35 5:00 55 10:00 75 36 5.25 56 10:25 76 37 5:50 57 10:50 77 38 5.75 58 10.75 78 39 6:00 59 11:00 79

Freq (In Hz) value 11:25 80 11:50 81 11.75 82 12:00 83 12:25 84 12:50 85 12.75 86 13:00 87 13:25 88 13:50 89 13.75 90 14:00 91 14:25 92 14:50 93 14.75 94 15:00 95 15:25 96 15:50 97 15.75 98 16.00 99

Freq (In Hz) 16:25 16:50 16.75 17:00 17:25 17:50 17.75 18:00 18:25 18:50 18.75 19:00 19:25 19:50 19.75 20:00 20:25 20:50 20.75 21:00

Noise-rate One of the 15 possible modulation sources of KS-32 is NOISE. The Noise generator is a modulation source that generates random level. It will look something like this:

NOISE 1

NOISE 2

+100

-100

-100 Noise rate

Noise rate

6-25

Page 118 Part 6 - standard sound programming

KS-32 user guide

The noise rate determines how often the changes of level. Low values ezeugen slow modulations, high values â&#x20AC;&#x2039;faster. Range: 00 to 99

Level / Dlay / Mod LFO Bank Press Edit Sound / LFO (Bank 3) / Screen. 1

Level = 99 = 00 Dlay Mod = WHEEL

Level - LFO level Adjusts the output intensity of LFO modulation. The effect an LFO modulator is added to this value. Range: 00 to 99

Dlay - LFO Delay Determines the delay of the LFO intensity, ie the time from zero to under the "Level" set value is reached. This makes it possible effects achieve vibrato and tremolo as transient.

Range: 00 to 99

Mod - LFO Depth modulation source Selects the 15 modulation sources for a LFO rate from. Each addressed here modulation source acts in addition to the value set under LFO level.

Wave / restart LFO Bank Press Edit Sound / LFO (Bank 3) / Screen. 2

Wave Here, the waveform for the LFO is selected. There are seven possible Values: • TRIANGLE - The delta wave, which usually vibrato or tremolo for is used. • SINE - The pure sine wave, not as abrupt in the borders. • SINE / TRI - A mixture of sine and triangle. • POS / SINE - POS / SINE is used in the fields such as POS / TRI. • POS / TRI - POS / TRI is a purely positive delta wave, useful for guitar-like vibrato, where the pitch shifted upwards only will.

6-26

Page 119 KS-32 user guide

Part 6 - standard sound programming • SAWTOOTH - The sawtooth wave is usually only for special Effects used. • SQUARE - The square wave generated trill.

LFO Wave Shapes +100

+100

-100

TRIANGLE

-100

SINE

-100

+100

+50

POS / SINE

POS / TRI

SINE / TRI

-100 SAWTOOTH

+100 0 -100

SQUARE

Restart Determines whether the LFO for each new keystroke again from "zero" to begin. When "OFF", the modulation is running constantly. When "ON" modulation with each stroke starts again at "zero".

6-27

Page 120 Part 6 - standard sound programming

KS-32 user guide

The filter bank Each KS-32 voice has its own pair of digital filters, Filter 1 and Filter 2, connected in series. The setting of the filter determines which Frequency range are passed to the exit.

Low-pass / high-pass A low-pass filter allows only frequencies below the cutoff point happen - higher frequencies are filtered out. The opposite is true for the high pass filter. He passes only the high frequencies. The KS-32 Filter 1 is always a low-pass filter 2 during both low- and Can be high-pass filter.

Pole: The slope "Pole" describing the slope, or the efficiency of a filter. When KS-32, the poles of the filter are dependent on each other. Are together it always four. These four poles are distributed on the two filters, that is 2: 2 or 3: 1. A 1-pole filter has a slope of 6 dB per octave, a 2-pole Filter 12 dB per octave and a 4-pole filter 24 dB. A 24 dB Low-pass filter to get (for the "classic" analog sounds) must be set to 12 dB, both filters - adds up to 24 dB.

Cutoff Frequency Each filter has a threshold known as the cutoff frequency. This is the Frequency at which the filtering begins. This cutoff frequency is determined be adjusted or modulated arbitrarily. It can be very interesting configurations developed by the filter different modulators occupied. It can be the one with the Modulation open while the other closes at the same time.

Filter1 / Filter2 Filter bank Press Edit Sound / filter (Bank 4) / Screen 0th Filter1 = 2LoPass Filter2 = 2HiPass

Filter1 - Filter 1 Mode Determines whether filter 1, a 2 pole or 4-pole low-pass should be.

Filter2 - Filter Mode 2 Filter 2 can be used as 2-pole or 1-pole high-pass and 2-pole or 1-pole low-pass function. These two parameters are interdependent. If a changed, also changes the other.

6-28

Page 121 KS-32 user guide Filter configurations

Part 6 - standard sound programming

This diagram shows some possible filter configurations. Links are the respective curves of the two filters shown separately. The right is the possible forms of the combined filter.

amplitudefreq. 18 db / oct + cutoff 0

amplitudefreq. 6 db / oct cutoff 0

frequency Filter 1 = 3 pole / low-pass

amplitude freq. 12 db / oct + cutoff 0

amplitude freq. 24 db / oct cutoff (When F1 & 2 are tuned to the same freq.) 0 frequency 4 pole / low-pass = Or

amplitude freq. 12 db / oct cutoff 0

amplitude

frequency Filter 1 = 3 / LP

freq. 12 db / oct + amplitude cutoff 0

frequency 6 db / oct Filter 2 = 1 pole / low-passamplitudefreq. cutoff # 2 freq. 24 db / oct cutoff # 1 0 frequency 4 pole / low-pass

frequency Filter 1 = 2 pole / low-pass

amplitude freq. 18 db / oct + cutoff 0

amplitudefreq. 24 db / oct cutoff (When F1 & 2 are tuned to the same freq.) 0 frequency 4 pole / low-pass = Or

frequency Filter 1 = 2 pole / low-pass

12 db / oct frequency amplitude Filter 2 = 2 pole / low-pass freq. cutoff # 1 freq. 24 db / oct cutoff # 2 0 frequency 4 pole / low-pass

6 db / oct freq. = cutoff

amplitude

frequency Filter 2 = 1 / HP

amplitude 12 db / octfreq. = cutoff 0

frequency Bandpass

amplitude

frequency Filter 2 = 2 pole / high-pass

F F B L

frequency Bandpass

6-29

Page 122 Part 6 - standard sound programming 41

KS-32 user guide

FC1 Cutoff / Envelope2 Filter bank Press Edit Sound / filter (Bank 4) / Screen. 1

FC1 Cutoff - 1 filter cutoff frequency Adjusts the filter cutoff frequency. In a low-pass filter at a value of 127 passed all frequencies. Takes back to the cutoff, the sound is muffled, such as the Treble controls on the stereo system. Range: 000 to 127

Envelope2 Determines the intensity of the second envelope the cutoff frequency modulated. Range: -99 to +99

FC1 Keyboard / Mod Source and Amount

Filter bank

Press Edit Sound / filter (Bank 4) / Screen. 2

Filter Cutoff FC1 Keyboard + 25 = Mod = VEL

Modulation source

* +29

Intensity

FC1 Keyboard Adjusts the intensity with which the keyboard will affect the filter cutoff. With positive values opens the filter, the higher you play (Keyboard Filter Tracking). For an exact keyboard tracking (ratio 1: 1) to achieve, make FC1 Keyboard = +50. Range: -99 to +99

Mod Source Here one of the 16 modulation sources is determined for the filter.

Mod Amount Adjusts the intensity of this modulation source for the cutoff frequency. Range: -99 to +99

6-30

Page 123 KS-32 user guide 43

Part 6 - standard sound programming

FC2 Cutoff / Envelope2 Filter bank Press Edit Sound / filter (Bank 4) / Screen. 3

FC2 Cutoff - 2 filter cutoff frequency Adjusts the filter cutoff frequency. In a low-pass filter at a value of 127 passed all frequencies. Taking the cutoff back, the sound darker, a bit like the treble control on the Stereo. Range: 000 to 127

Envelope2 Modulation intensity envelope for the 2nd filter. 2 Range: -99 to +99

FC2 Keyboard / FC1 Mod> FC2 Filter bank Press Edit Sound / filter (Bank 4) / Screen. 4

FC2 Keyboard Adjusts the intensity with which the keyboard will affect the filter cutoff. With positive values opens the filter, the higher you play (Keyboard Filter Tracking). For an exact keyboard tracking (ratio 1: 1) to achieve, make FC1 Keyboard = +50. Range: -99 to +99

Mod-FC1> FC2 Herewith the gewähle for filter 1 modulation source for filter 2 taken. FC 2If no separate modulation source. This is the only possibility to modulate its cutoff. Is "Mod FC1 -> FC2 = ON", has Filter 2 has the same modulation as filter first

The Env2 and amp benches

The parameters of this screen are exactly those of the screens for Env 1 match ( Bank 2 ). More on this in part by Env 1, a few pages earlier. Again, Env 1 controls the pitch, Env 2 filter cutoff and the Amp Volume.

6-31

Page 124 Part 6 - standard sound programming

KS-32 user guide

The output Bank The output database parameter control, along with the amp Envelope, the output volume and the panorama (the Assignment in the stereo image) of the voice. There are also keyboard scaling, Effect allocation and assignment voices (Voice Priority).

V / Boost / Mod Source and Amount Output Bank Press Edit Sound / Output (Bank 7) / Screen 0th Output level

Boost

V = 84 Boost = OFF Mod LFO

Modulation source

* +29

Intensity

Volume - Voice volume Adjusts the overall volume of the voice. (Can also known as the intensity Understand the amp envelope.) Range: 00 to 99

Boost - increase in volume If you switch this parameter, the volume of the voice to +12 is raised dB ("boosted"). Not for cardiac patients. • ON - +12 dB boost the output volume. • OFF - The Voice is played normally.

Mod Source - Volume modulator To select one of the 16 modulation sources, in addition to the amp Envelope that is always active.

Mod Amount - volume modulation intensity Volume modulator Amount - Determines the Imtensität, with here Volume is affected. Range: -99 to +99

6-32

Page 125 KS-32 user guide 71

Part 6 - standard sound programming

KeybdScale / KeyRange Output Bank Press Edit Sound / Output (Bank 7) / Screen. 1 The following two parameters at the bottom of this display set versatile tool for volume control through the keyboard is:

KeybdScale - Keyboard-scale intensity (or zone) This can be a voice over a certain range of the keyboard on or be hidden (see below). Crossfade This allows (Transitions) from one voice to another implement. A value of +99 displays a voice from zero to full volume, within the below defined zone. -99 With the opposite happens, the voice is hidden. Intermediate values hide the voice from zero to a certain intermediate value. If the parameter is set to ZONE, the voice is within the limits identical, as they can not be heard outside this range.

KeyRange - Highest and lowest key Determines the limits for Fade In, Fade Out or ZONE. Is this Selected parameter values with the data entry control , the • Yes Up / Down • No cursor or entered from the keyboard be. Select this parameter and simply play the lowest The desired zone button. The note is displayed and the cursor jumps up high key. Now you play the highest key of their zone. The Value is accepted and the cursor disappears. Do You Have something wrong, you simply select the parameter again, and correct input on your camera.

Output Bus / Priority Output Bank Press Edit Sound / Output (Bank 7) / Screen. 2

Output bus Every voice of a sound can be assigned to one of three "effects loops" be. The diagram below shows the waveform of each path. See Part 4 - Effects for more information on programming of certain Effects. DRY Vol

Pan

L R

FX1 Effect 1

Mix1

Effect 2

Outputs

Voice Output FX2

Mix2

Destination Bus

6-33

Page 126 Part 6 - standard sound programming

KS-32 user guide

Priority This parameter allows you to determine how the Distribution of votes in the KS-32 is made. The Voice can "LOW, MID or HIGH Priority "have. The simple rule is that a voice can be "stolen" from another only if they have a lower or has the same priority. MEDIUM is the usual setting for this parameter. LOW can

you take for voices that are dispensable in most (such. as voices, duplicated the same sound, play with mild depression). HIGH it starts at the top for sounds that are to be protected, as Solo sounds, drums or important areas in a sequence.

Pan / Vel Window Output Bank Press Edit Sound / Output (Bank 7) / Screen. 3

Pan - Pan position Spread the voice in the stereo mix. The range is from 00 (far left) to 99 (right). 50 is exactly in the middle.

VelWindow Here are a dynamic value is entered on the or the Voice is not being played. This can be dynamic transitions between Voices realize. Range: -127 to +127. At +000, the parameter no effect. Positive values â&#x20AC;&#x2039;mean the voice plays only when the Dynamics is higher than the value. Lower for negative values.

6-34

Page 127 KS-32 user guide

Part 7 - drum sound programming

Part 7 - drum sound programming â&#x20AC;˘ This part includes all the parameters of the programming Drum sets have to do. The KS-32 drum sound construction ......................................... .................... 7 - 1 Selecting the drum sound Edit ........................................... ...................... 7 - 1 The Sound Edit mode ............................................ .................................. 7 - 2 The Wave Bank .............................................. .......................................... 7 - 2 Current note number .............................................. .................. 7 - 2 Key Range - Low key / high key .......................................... ....... 7 - 3 How to "gaps" in the Key Map opens .................................... 7 - 3 Wave-class ............................................... ...................................... 7 - 4 Wave-name ............................................... ..................................... 7 - 5 Direction ................................................. ........................................ 7 - 5 Clear-key-mapped ............................................. .................................. 7 - 5 Change sound mode ............................................. ......................... 7 - 6 The Pitch Bank .............................................. ........................................... 7 - 6 Oct...................................................................................................7 - 6 Keyboard Pitch tracking ............................................. .................. 7 - 7 The Filter-Bank.........................................................................................7 - 7 Fc-cut - filter cutoff frequency ......................................... ..... 7 - 7 Gate time ............................................... ........................................ 7 - 8 Levv - Velocity-level control ........................................... ........ 7 - 8 Voice stealing ............................................... .............................. 7 - 8 The output Bank .............................................. ........................................ 7-9 Volume - Voice volume ............................................. ............. 7-9

Output bus ............................................... ....................................... 7-9 Utilization of the General MIDI drum maps ......................................... .7 - 10 Use of performance presets ............................................. ............... 7-11

The KS-32 drum sound structure As mentioned earlier, there are two types sounds in the KS-32: Default sounds and drum sounds. Drum sounds are different from Default sounds in two ways: The number of voices - Standard Sounds consist of three Voices, Drum Sounds from 17 different voices. Each voice, another His instrument. In drum sounds is always only a sound on each Button. The voices construction - Each of the 17 voices of a drum sound consists of: • a digital oscillator with a KS-32 waveforms (Except TRANS WAVES and MULTI-WAVE). • Two multi-mode digital filter, fixedly coupled as a 4-pole low pass. • a number of specific drum sound parameters.

Selecting the drum sound Edit Because the KS-32 has two different sound modes, it also has two Edit Mode; one for default sounds and one for drum sounds. About to program a drum sound, you must first enter Drum Edit Fashion. There are two ways to Drum Edit mode:

7-1

Page 128 Part 7 - drum sound programming

KS-32 user guide

• Sound Mode command - This is the normal way to the in between Modes switch. The command is on screen 05 ( Bank 0 , Screen 5 ) in two edit modes. • Selection of Sounds - A second possibility is the simple Selecting a corresponding sounds. Together with the sound also changes the edit mode. It comes in the Drum Edit by you call a drum sound, and then press the Edit Sound button.

The Sound Edit mode Each time you want to change a drum sound, you must KS-32 first place on the Sound Edit mode. This is done by Press the Edit Sound button. If you are in the Sound Edit mode, but have not been selected drum sound, you must first Change sound mode command call ( Edit Sound, Wave Bank ( Bank 0 ) Screen 5 to enter a default drum sound. After you Under Change sound mode Enter • Save pressed, you can change individual drum sound parameters to your liking, or a whole new sound to create.

The Wave Bank In the Wave Bank waveform and the corresponding playback can Parameters of the voice to be edited.

Current Key Number / Key Range / Wave Name Wave Bank Press Edit Sound / Wave (bank 0) / Screen 0th Current key number

Key = # A4 DYNAMIC

Lo Key

Hi Key

: G5

KICK

Wave Name

Current note number Use this parameter to 17 different drum voices are selected.

Select a default sound, and then change the sound Mode to enter the drum sound-Edit (more on the exchange of Sound Mode "Screen 5 - Change sound mode"). This causes the Default map loaded into the edit buffer. You will notice that each time you press a different key, the corresponding Note number changes. Here, the parameters for the change Keyboard range (low key and high key) and the waveform only

7-2

Page 129 KS-32 user guide

Part 7 - drum sound programming several keys. If you count times carefully, you will notice that There are exactly 17 different. By playing on the keyboard always choose new voices to Editing on. Next, set the waveform, the range or the Change sound parameters.

Key-Range - Low key / high key The low and high key parameters together form the range, in which the individual drum sound is heard (a voice). Have you selected this parameter, you can quite easily Pressing the appropriate buttons to enter the range (only low Key, then high key).

How to "gaps" in the Key Map opens If you change the tonal range of a particular campaign, it may happen that these will then cover one or more other voices. The may look like this:

As you can see, the cover 11 voices to the keyboard range of KS 32 from. The 6 remaining voices are hidden (shaded here shown). Let's say you want to add an additional voice (because They realize that you can not live without tambourine): To freizubekommen another voice, you must: â&#x20AC;˘ first find a button for your tambourine, z. B. F here. 6 Next, we have to go through at the point the gap â&#x20AC;˘ Select the voice that is currently on F 6 (by F 6 play), and change their range so that the lowest note higher than F 6. Because we do not need additional voices on R 6, the highest note remain as it is. This closes a gap in R 6 is produced, for now here is no Voice more places.

7-3

Page 130 Part 7 - drum sound programming

KS-32 user guide

• Play F 6 to select the Voice. The display shows:

Key = ??? ANVIL

F # 6: G6 HIT

One of the previously hidden voices is listed by playing the key call, and put into the gap. If more than one voice obscured be after this called by repeatedly pressing the number key. The question mark means that on this key not have a voice or is defined. • To finish it off, you define the range for this Voice, make it a part of the map. Then locate the shaft waveform varies and edit as desired.

Class Wave / Wave Name Wave Bank Press Edit Sound / Wave (bank 0) / Screen. 1

Wave = STRING WAVE STRING ENSEMBLE

Waveform Class

Single shaft

Wave Class This parameter determines the waveform for a given class Voice. Select this parameter, you can use the Data Entry Controller or the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor through the various Classes scroll. Then select the exact waveform. Each time the waveform class is changed, is the first Waveform of this class in the display. The KS-32 waveforms are divided into 13 classes: These classes include samples of acoustic and electronic Sounds that serve as the basis for many realistic sounds. If necessary, these waves multisamples (of different stand points of the Tonal range resampled) for an authentic sound reproduction. (A detailed list of all waveform classes, see Part 6 Standard sound programming ).

Note : Do waveforms from the classes TRANS WAVES and MULTI-WAVE not be used as drum sounds.

7-4

Page 131 KS-32 user guide

Part 7 - drum sound programming

Wave Name Here is the exact waveform is selected, played by the Voice should be. This is done using the data entry control , with the Up / Down cursor possibility to change class. You will find (A list of all waveforms in the previous section 6 above Standard sound programming )

Direction Wave Bank

Press Edit Sound / Wave (bank 0) / Screen. 2

Direction Allows the playback direction the wave is determined. Forward and backward are possible.

Have waveforms from the WAVEFORM and inharmonic classes only a fixed direction of play. In their case, this parameter skipped.

Clear Key Map Wave Bank

Press Edit Sound / Wave (bank 0) / Screen. 3

Clear Key Map This command displays the current key-map is deleted from the edit buffer and all voices set to a range of A0 A0. With the Enter â&#x20AC;˘ Save button is released this command. Use it if you to discard their work and begin again.

7-5

Page 132 Part 7 - drum sound programming 04

Set Default Map Wave Bank

KS-32 user guide

Press Edit Sound / Wave (bank 0) / Screen. 4

Set default Map This is all that was in the edit buffer, cleared, and the plant's default settings replaced. The figure shows these default Settings:

Default Drum Map

Electric Kick

Room Room Crash Dry Tom Tam Kick Snare Pedal Has Cymbal High Bongo Borine Finger Thump Closed Open Ride Dry Tom Snare HasHas Cymbal Low Timbale ClapsCowbellSnaps

KICK DRUMS

HI-HATS SNARE DRUMS CYMBALS

TOM TOMS

MISC. PERCUSSION

Drum sound groups

Change Sound Mode Wave Bank Press Edit Sound / Wave (bank 0) / Screen. 5

Change sound mode Press the Enter â&#x20AC;˘ Save button to toggle the sound mode. If you are in drum sound mode, which will bring up the standard Sound mode, and the default settings for default sounds are in the edit buffer is loaded.

The Pitch Bank In the pitch-bank the basic settings for the pitch to the Voice carried out, and whether the pitch affects from the keyboard to be or not.

Oct / Semi / Fine (Voice Tune) Pitch Bank Press Edit Sound / Pitch (Bank 1) / Screen 0th

Oct Changes the pitch in octave steps. Range: -4 to +4 octaves

7-6

Page 133 KS-32 user guide

Part 7 - drum sound programming

Semi Changes the pitch in semitones. Go beyond -11 or +11 addition, the octave is one step increased / decreased.

Fine Changes the pitch of the voice in one-cent steps (1/100 of a semitone) Range: -99 to +99

Keyboard Pitch Tracking Pitch Bank Press Edit Sound / Pitch (Bank 1) / Screen. 1

Keyboard Pitch Tracking Determines whether the pitch of the voice are controlled by the keyboard is, or is fixed at C4. â&#x20AC;˘ ON - The pitch is controlled by the keyboard. â&#x20AC;˘ OFF - All buttons have the same pitch (C4) when the oscillator Has not been changed tune parameters. Otherwise, the voice to the there certain value transposed.

The filter bank The filter settings determine the tone of the voice. Drum Sounds all have a 4-pole low-pass filter. Read more in the chapter on Filter bank in Part 6 - Standard sound programming .

11 40

Fc Cutoff /Pitch Keyboard levv Tracking Pitch bank Filter Bank Press Edit Sound / filter Pitch(Bank (Bank4)1)/ /Screen Screen.0th 1

Fc cutoff - filter cutoff frequency Specifies the initial value for the filter cutoff. At 127 all Frequencies to pass. Lower settings curtail the high Frequency components of the sound. Range: 000 to 127

Levv - Velocity-level control This parameter lowers the filter cutoff, a weaker attack. The is, the FcCutoff value is the peak value of only the strongest Stop is reached. With the velocity level is determined by how strongly the cutoff is taken back by light touch. This results in a precise dynamic control of the filter, depending on the stop. Range: 00 to 99

7-7

Page 134 Part 7 - drum sound programming

KS-32 user guide

The amp Bank In the AMP -Bank the parameters for the output volume is the Voice controlled within a drum sounds.

Gate time / release time Amp Bank Press Edit Sound / Amp (Bank 6) / Screen 0th

Gate time Determines the time that remains the envelope to its peak before enters the release phase. Range: 00 to 99

Note : This parameter is only effective in FINISH mode. Release time In the NORMAL mode which is the time of the envelope after releasing Key needed to get back to zero. In FINISH mode begins the release time after the expiration of the gate time, no matter when the button was released. Range: 00 to 99

Levv / Fashion Amp Bank

Press Edit Sound / Amp (Bank 6) / Screen. 1

Levv - Velocity-level control The Velocity-level parameter decreases the volume at lower Stop. As with the corresponding filter parameter here is the set under Voice Volume volume of the peak value. The higher the Value for levv, the greater the change in volume is due to the presence impact dynamics Range: 00 to 99

Fashion - Amp Envelope mode â&#x20AC;˘ NORMAL - The envelope plays back normally, as in the Figure is shown on the following page. â&#x20AC;˘ FINISH - The envelope makes a full bore, no matter how long the Button was pressed. The envelope wait while the gate time, until it in the release time occurs. This is good for percussion sounds, which always equal duration, regardless of how long a key is held.

Voice Steal To optimize the use of all 32 voices of the KS-32, and inevitable "voice stealing" to get a grip, it is helpful, the relationship between used waveform and the Envelope fashion to understand.

7-8

Page 135 KS-32 user guide

Part 7 - drum sound programming A looped (standing) waveform blocked the vote until the Envelope speed has reached zero. In normal envelope mode: And with envelope fashion FINISH: For ungeloopte waveforms (primarily Percussion and Drum Waves)

applies: The voice is free, once the sample has been played once, no matter what the envelope level. The voice is free for another Sound:

The output Bank The parameters of the output -Bank control the overall volume and the Panorama of the voice.

Volume / Boost / Pan Output Bank Press Edit Sound / Output (Bank 7) / Screen 0th

Volume - Voice volume Controls the overall volume of the voice. Range: 00 to 99

Boost - Volume increase If this parameter is set to "ON", the selected voice in the level of +12 DB raised. Not for infarct at risk. â&#x20AC;˘ ON - The voice adds a +12 dB boost. â&#x20AC;˘ OFF - The voice is normal.

Pan - Panorama Arranges the voice in the stereo image. The range is from -98 (hard left) to +98 (far right). The value of +00 corresponds exactly to the middle.

Output Bus / VelCurv Output Bank Press Edit Sound / Output (Bank 7) / Screen. 1

Output bus Every voice of a sound can be assigned to one of three effects loops be. The diagram below shows the waveform of the three paths. More this in part 4 - Effects .

7-9

Page 136 Part 7 - drum sound programming

KS-32 user guide

VelCurv - velocity curve Here one of the four dynamic curves for the envelope is selected. These must be the parameters for the dynamic control (levv, Bank 6, Screen 1 ) be nonzero. The four curves are: QUICKRISE, CONVEX, LINEAR and CONCAVE.

Utilization of the General MIDI drum maps The KS-32 has two drum sounds, which together form the General MIDI Forming drum map. They lie in the squares 98 and 99 and read: GNL-MIDI kit (98) - A general purpose drum kit with the basic elements a traditional drum kit. GNL MIDI Perc (99) - 17 different percussion instruments for all Musical styles. These two drum sounds can be used as templates for your own, alternative Kits be used easily by other waveforms in the Voices be used. You will see that there are empty spaces in both sets. The allows in poly mode that both sounds with double

can be superimposed, so a 34-voice drum kit to make up. In this mode, you will find plenty of drum sounds to their to realize musical ideas (assuming you prefer General MIDI drum map). If you products of other manufacturers with General MIDI drum map and use the combined sounds of the GNL MIDI kit (98) and the Want to share GNL-MIDI Perc (99), proceed as follows:

1) Define your external sequencer MIDI channel for the Drum track. In the General MIDI standard, the channel would be # 10th

2) Select the same channel (# 10) for the KS-32 GNL-MIDI kit (98). 3) Copy the track in your external sequencer. 4) Enter the copied track a different MIDI channel, z. B. Channel # 11.

5) Select the same MIDI channel (# 11) for the KS-32 GNL-MIDI Perc (99). In this environment would be the first drum track GNL-MIDI kit (98) and the second GNL-MIDI Perc (99) control. Since both sets into one another access, there is no double notes in a loss of polyphony.

7-10

Page 137 KS-32 user guide

Part 7 - drum sound programming

Use of performance presets The KS-32 is factory with 30 internal "Performance Presets" on the Banks 0 to 2 equipped. These presets are intended to Split and Layer capabilities of the KS-32, as well as the Einsazt in MIDI connection to demonstrate. The performance preset # 29 shows the two General MIDI Kits in combination on different MIDI channels (10 and 11 in this Case). Make sure that your external sequencer also in this Channels is set. Although we can not know what further MIDI instruments you will use these performance presets be valuable tools when using the KS-32 as a MIDI studio.

Important:

This performance "templates" are not saved in ROM. If the KS-32 must re-initialize, these presets are gone. If this So you want to back up, we recommend archiving via MIDI Sys-Ex, so as in storage - Part 11 described.

GNL-MIDI kit Drum Map (98) CLOSED HI-HAT PEDAL 1 HI-HAT HI-HAT ROOM TOM LOW OPEN CRASH CYMBAL CLAPS RIDE CYMBAL SIDE STICK SNARE TAMBOURINE

CRASH CYMBAL ELECTRIC KICK TOM ROOM HIGH ROOM SNARE TOM ROOM HIGH DANCE SNARE TOM ROOM HIGH ROOM TOM LOW The diagram shows the key assignment for the GNL-MIDI kit (98)

GNL MIDI Perc Drum Map (99) BELL-2 TIMBALES AGOGO SHAKER TIMBALES WHISTLE BONGOS CLAVES TRIANGLE BONGOS

WOODBLOCK BONGOS WOODBLOCK CONGA SLAP WHISTLE BONGOS AGOGO BELL-2SHAKER Keys for GNL-MIDI Perc (99).

7-11

Page 139 138 KS-32 user guide

Part 8 - Presets

Part 8 - Presets About Presets..............................................................................................8 - 1 Selecting presets ............................................... ............................... 8 - 1 Preset mode and Sequencer Mode ........................................... ............... 8 - 1 About tracks ................................................ .............................................. 8 - 2 Layers of sounds through the track buttons .......................................... ... 8 - 3 The Replace-track sound button .......................................... .................... 8 - 3 Exchange of sounds in a track ............................................ ........ 8 - 3 Insert a Sound with effect .......................................... 8 - 4 From the sound mode ............................................. ....................... 8 - 4 From the Sequence / Preset Edit mode ......................................... ... 8 - 4 From the Select-Sequence / Preset Mode ......................................... 8 - 4 Effects and Presets ............................................... .................................... 8-5 About track performance parameter ............................................ ........... 8-6 Layer-Lock ............................................... ................................................ 8 - 6 The "Make Default Preset" (Copy Preset) Functions ............................ 8 - 7 Select Sound Mode (Make-default preset) ....................................... ........... 8 - 7 In the Sequence / Preset Mode (Copy Preset) The Edit Track screens ............................................ .............................. 8 - 10 Vol - Volume ............................................... ........................................ 8 - 10 Pan - Panorama ............................................... ..................................... 8 - 10 Output.....................................................................................................8 - 10 Key-Range..............................................................................................8 - 11 Transpose................................................................................................8 - 11 Chan - MIDI Channel ............................................. ............................. 8-12 Prog - MIDI program number ........................................... ............. 8-12 Program change in the KS-32 ............................................. ..................... 8-13 ENSONIQ 's special bank "control" program change commands ....... 8-13 Selecting a new sequence / song-effect via MIDI ......................... 8-13 MIDI-Status............................................................................................8 - 14 Pressure - Aftertouch ............................................... ............................ 8 - 14 Sustain pedal ............................................... ........................................... 8-15 Timbre - 15 Release....................................................................................................8 - 16

About presets A preset is a combination of up to eight sounds and the correimpaired performance parameters, as well as an Effect. The whole is quickly accessible and thus ideal for live use. The Preset section, making it the Master Keyboard Department of the KS-32. At the same time a preset is also the basis for a sequence in Sequencer. Here you will find all the necessary settings. The eight sounds a preset lie on eight tracks (tracks). Each track also stores: • What has been assigned sound, • whether the sound should sound alone, together or not at all, • and the values of all performance parameters for this track. At a preset effect also includes a program for all eight tracks.

8-1

Page 140

Part 8 - Presets

KS-32 user guide

Selecting presets Press Select Seq / preset . The LED above the Select Seq / Preset - button indicates that you are now in the Sequence / Preset Select Mode is. On the bottom line in the display the name of the current preset. Top you will see a "context" information and the position of the preset. Whenever the Select Seq / Preset LED glows all, is the KS-32 in the Sequence / Preset Select mode. Over the 10 Bank and Screen - keys can now be selected presets or sequences be (instead of the sound when the Select Sound LED lights).

Preset mode and Sequencer Mode A preset is a combination of eight tracks, the optionally can be superimposed, and the corresponding sounds and performance parameters for each track. A sequence is simply a preset with recorded Noteninformations. In fact, each preset has been the basis of a sequence; but it contains all the parameters for the sequencer tracks (hence tracks). In other words: A preset is a sequence without notes. In a preset can always be added, resulting in a sequence of makes it. The relationship between presets and Seuqenzen looks like this:

Preset

Sequence

Global Effect Sound + Performance Parameter Sound + Performance Parameter Sound + Performance Parameter Sound + Performance Parameter Sound + Performance Parameter Sound + Performance Parameter Sound + Performance Parameter Sound + Performance Parameter

Note and Controller Data

Track 1

Note and Controller Data

Track 2

Note and Controller Data

Track 3

Note and Controller Data

Track 4

Note and Controller Data

Track 5

Note and Controller Data

Track 6

Note and Controller Data

Track 7

Note and Controller Data

Track 8

As you can see is a preset as a "carrier" for note information in each Sequence contained.

8-2

Page 141 KS-32 user guide

Part 8 - Presets

About Tracks The KS-32 uses the term track for one of the eight internal channels (in Song Mode 16) each have a sound and associated performance Parameters such as volume, pan, controller settings, MIDI Channel keyboard range includes, among other things. If the KS-32 used as a multi-mode sound generator, and of his own sequencer is playing, control the sequencer tracks the supply various sounds that are played by the KS-32. Just can Seuqenzer keyboard and external MIDI sound sources on the MIDI Control channels. If the KS-32 is driven by an external MIDI Seqenzer, let

The different tracks put on different MIDI channels turn sounds of the KS-32 drive. Whether that is KS-32 played directly MIDI data to an external device sending or receiving of a foreign sequencer data, we denote the combination of MIDI channel, sound and performance parameters as Track. Each KS-32 Preset has eight independent, polyphonic tracks by the eight track buttons (Tracks 1-8) can be selected. We see ourselves more detail at: • Press Select Seq / preset . Thus, the KS-32 is Seqences / Presets Select mode. • Press Track 1 The display looks like this.: Track number Trk01

Sound Group INT

Program number 01

Top Forty Kit

Name of the track sounds Here you can see the sounds on track 1. With the other track buttons reach the remaining 7 tracks.

Layers of sounds through the track buttons In a preset, a sound with up to 7 other sounds superimposed be (layering). This allows 8 sounds be stacked, or distributed by splits the keyboard (Key Range function). To be layered sounds in a preset: • Press Select Seq / preset and one of the eight tracks. • with a quick double on the track button of the sound that should be taken to, the sound is doubled. Doubled Tracks can be identified by flashing its LED. By simply pressing the Track key can be taken out again each layer.

8-3

Page 142 Part 8 - Presets

KS-32 user guide

The Replace-track sound button Exchange of sounds in a track To replace the current sound in a track, press the Replace-Track Sound - button, whether the Edit or SelectSequence / Preset Mode. The Replace-Track Sound - LED flashes. In the Display shows the track number, the sound group and the Program number is stored in the current sound in the track. Track number Trk01

Sound Group INT

Program number 01

Top Forty Kit

Name of the track sounds

• The Bank and screen buttons you can now replace the sound. In Replace track sound mode, the Bank and screen buttons select new Sounds to, rather than sequences, songs or parameters. • To achieve a sound from another set (INT, ROM, CARD A or B CARD), press repeatedly the BankSet button, or press and hold BankSet and at the same time Bank buttons 1,2,3 or fourth • To change the displayed track, press either the Left / right cursor keys or the corresponding track button. • The Edit Track / Screen 4 (MIDI Program = ###) Page is automatically updated when another sound is copied to a track. • Press the Replace-Track Sound - button again to the

Replace-track sound mode to leave. The KS-32 returns in the fashion back where it was before.

Insert a sound effect together with To add a sound effect along with his program in a track to (which overwrites the previous preset effect) copy, use the function "To Include Effects Hold and press a track Button " . Clear? No ??? So here it depends on the mode in which You are currently in:

From the Sound Mode: • Press the Select Sound button. • Use the BankSet, banking and screen buttons to the sound to find the one you want to install the current preset. • Press and hold the Replace-track sound button, and while they hold , press one of the 8 track buttons.

8-4

Page 143 KS-32 user guide

Part 8 - Presets • The KS-32 automatically switches to the Sequence / Preset Edit mode, with the last sound is selected. Its effect is now the new preset Effect. The track of this sound is now the current edit track. • The Replace-track sound - LED will flash to indicate that the KS-32 is still in the Replace-track sound mode. The Bank and Screen Keys can still be used to replace the sound. By pressing the other track buttons to select other tracks. In the Unlike normal Replace-track sound mode is here, however, always the accompanying effect copied in the preset. • To exit the special Replace-track sound mode, press the Replace-Track Sound - button. The KS-32 returns to the select Sound mode back.

From the Sequence / Preset Edit mode • Press the Select Sound button. • Use the BankSet, banking and screen buttons to the sound to find the one you want to install the current preset. • Press the Edit Seq / Preset button, the KS-32 switches to Sequence / Preset Edit mode. • Press and hold the Replace-Track Sound - button, and while they hold , press one of the 8 track buttons. • The selected last in the Select Sound Mode Sound is in the desired track installed. Its effect will the new preset effect. The selected track will be the new edit track. • The Replace-track sound - LED will flash to indicate that the KS-32 still in Replace mode sound track is. The Bank and Screen Keys can still be used to replace the sound. By pressing the other track buttons to select other tracks. In the Unlike normal Replace-track sound mode is here, however, always the accompanying effect copied in the preset. • To exit the special Replace-track sound mode, press the Replace-Track Sound - button. The KS-32 returns to the select Sound mode back.

From the Select Sequence / Preset Mode: • Press the Select Sound button. • Use the BankSet, banking and screen buttons to the sound to find the one you want to install the current preset. • Press the Select Seq / Preset button, the KS-32 switches to Sequence / Preset Select mode. • Press and hold the Replace-track sound T aste, and while they hold , press one of the 8 track buttons. • The selected last in the Select Sound Mode Sound is in the desired track installed. Its effect will the new preset effect. However, the layer of the preset state is maintained. In this Way can the effect setting within a layer combination change, without at the state of the individual tracks to change anything.

• The Replace-track sound - LED will flash to indicate that the KS-32 is still in the Replace-track sound mode. The Bank and Screen Keys can still be used to replace the sound,

8-5

Page 144 Part 8 - Presets

KS-32 user guide here again without changing anything at Layer state of the tracks. In contrast to the normal Replace-track sound mode is here, however, always the accompanying effect copied in the preset. With the Left / right cursor keys you can select other tracks and also there replace the sound in effect, without the Layer Influencing combination. If you hold a track button directly, changes also the layer combination. • To exit the special Replace-track sound mode, press the Replace-Track Sound - button. The KS-32 returns to the Select Sound Mode back.

Effects and Presets All eight tracks of a preset share the same effect program. Effect Parameters can be under Edit Seq / Preset Effects - Bank (Bank 8) change. The effect of a preset, sequence or song taken at the first edit of the current sequence. Fits this not for all sounds, there are several options: • Sounds, where the effect does not fit, can be "dry" down; Effect Controls: DRY. (See Edit Track, Screen 3 , later in this Part.) • Replace the effect in favor of a less conspicuous program better fits all sounds. (See also Part 4 - Effects ).

About Track Performance Parameters Each track has a series of associated performance parameters. This Parameters control some important parameters for tuning the sounds each other. They can be changed while playing and are therefore particularly suitable for use on stage or sequencer work. The settings of these parameters are combined with each preset stored. These presets can be called directly in addition to an common effect program eight different sounds with the associated parameters for volume, pitch range, transpose etc. Such settings are stored individually for each track and remain so after the receive off. All performance parameters can be accessed via the ten screen buttons on the Edit Track mode so described on the front panel. Press So the Edit Track - button, followed by the screen buttons to the To select performance parameters. The Edit Track parameter are: Screen # 0 0 1 2 3

Parameter Volume Pan Output Bus KeyRange Transpose

Description Total volume of the track Stereo panorama of the track sounds This sets the assignment Specifies the key range Transposition of the track

8-6

Page 145 KS-32 user guide

Part 8 - Presets 4 4 5

(MIDI) Channel (MIDI) Program (MIDI) Status

MIDI channel number of tracks MIDI program change number Adjusts the MIDI transmission

Pressure Type

7 8 9

Sustain Pedal Timbre Release

Aftertouch type for MIDI reception (also for transfer of the KS-32 keyboard) Governs Sutain pedal (on / off) Programmable sound change Regulation of the release time

These parameters can be used a complex Performance Create setup for the KS-32 along with other MIDI devices. Thus, the KS-32 is a full-fledged MIDI master keyboard. More about the individual parameters later in this section.

Layer-Lock The KS-32 usually changes after pressing the Edit Track - button the Sequence / Preset Edit mode. Thereby, the last selected track selected for editing and only this track will be audible. Normally, the layers of track is in Sequence / Preset Edit mode not possible. Using the Layer-Lock function, however, the current Combination of gelayerten tracks are dynamically "frozen", so that performance parameters can change in this state. This allows you to edit performance parameters of a track and at the same time the complete combination of sounds heard, so that can be changed relative to each individual sounds. A track-layer combination "freeze": • Press Select Seq / preset. • Select a track and turn double-other Tracks to do so. • Press and hold the Select Seq / Preset - button while you press the Edit Track - button. Now light the Select Seq / Preset and Edit Track LEDs simultaneously and the KS-32 is thus in the "Layer Lock" Edit track mode. All Edit track are performance-parameter screens as always available either by repeatedly pressing the Edit Track - button, the left / right cursor keys or by "Speed Dial" on the screen - buttons. If you are now one of the track buttons Press to change so that only the track to be edited, but not the Layer combination. • To exit the "Layer Lock" Track Edit mode, simply press any other mode button.

The "Make Default Preset" (Copy Preset) functions The Make Default Preset - button performs various tasks, depending on whether it is called from the sound or Sequence / Preset Mode out.

8-7

Page 146 Part 8 - Presets

KS-32 user guide

Select Sound Mode (Make-default preset) Press the Sound Mode, make-default preset - button, a new preset produces the lowest free space. If the been edited current Seq / preset track parameters before appears first the "Save Changes?" message if you are using the default Settings are overwritten. (Remember: The "Save ? Changes "message can be selected with the parameter - Edit Seq / Preset Control - Bank, Screen 15 ) are suppressed. The newly created preset according to the default preset Template is configured, as printed on the front panel of the KS-32. Track 1 2 3 4 StatusLOCAL LOCAL LOCAL Key Zone Full Full LOCAL LowerUpper Channel BaseBaseBaseBase SoundCurrent Previous Current Current 8 Track 5 6 7 StatusMIDI MIDIMIDI MIDI Key Zone Full Full Lower Upper Channel BaseBaseBaseBase The default preset template is considered as the starting point for MIDI Master Keyboard applications. It is configured as follows:

• The current sound that you had been selected in the Sound Mode, in the Tracks 1, 3, 4, 5, 7 and 8 copied. Its effect settings are stored in the ESP-chip loaded. • The penultimate sound that you had been selected in the sound mode is in lanes 2 and 6. This gives you instant access to these sound for the layer. • All MIDI channels of the tracks are set to the base channel you under System • MIDI, Screen 4 can set. • Tracks 1-4 have MIDI Status = LOCAL. • Tracks 5-8 have MIDI Status = MIDI. • Is under System • MIDI, Screen 4 as status = LOCAL, appears Default preset with track. 1 • Is under System • MIDI, Screen 4 as status = BOTH, appears Default preset layered together with Track 1 and 5. • Is under System • MIDI, Screen 4 as status = MIDI or * EXT * the default preset appears only track. 5 • The tracks 3 and 7 have as KeyRange preset A0 - B3. Thus, for you instantly call up keyboard splits for the lower half of the keyboard, both internally via MIDI. • The Tracks 4 and 8 have as KeyRange preset C4 - C8. Thus, for you instantly call up keyboard splits for the upper half of the keyboard - even again internally and via MIDI. • The name of the new preset is first "Sequence ##", where ## of the Memory number corresponds with the preset automatically has been saved. This name can be any time in the Edit Seq / Preset Mode under Seq Commands, Screen 4 be amended ("Rename SEQ / Pset").

8-8

Page 147 KS-32 user guide

Part 8 - Presets If a default preset template is created, it has no Time Signature (Time Signature). If you look like a template, the Record Button, the first screen appears with the clock prefix, as would you create a new sequence. After the first shot and pressing the Stop • Continue - key, the query "Keep first ### Bars? ", As in the normal mode sequencer. From here behaves the Default preset template just like any other sequence also.

In the Sequence / Preset Mode (Copy Preset): Press the Sequence / Preset mode, the make-default preset button the Copy Preset - called function, as shown on the front panel in Brackets. With the Copy Preset - Preset function are Data of the current sequence to a * EMPTY SEQ / PSET * or * SONG * EMPTY space copied. The Copy Preset copy function However, no clock information or other unsecured changes current parameter settings. It is therefore advisable to copy only and then edit the preset copy. The target preset behaves as well as a default preset pattern template , as described above. If a sequence is selected, you can use the sequence preset data in any Copy to other free-space sequence. If a song is selected, are accordingly only the free song memory spaces. To copy preset data in a clear sequence / song space select to any defined sequence. The display shows: SEQ ## STOP Copy Preset Data

• Press Enter • Save . The display is now "From Preset Seq ##" to display the current sequence. • Press the right cursor button. The display will then:

To Preset = Seq - ##

You can now use the Data Entry knob or the Up • Yes / No • Down-cursor Buttons to input a free pick preset location. • If you have selected the new position, press the Enter • Save button to complete the command. The display briefly shows "command appears "To confirm successful! To execution.

8-9

Page 148 Part 8 - Presets

KS-32 user guide

The Edit Track Screens To edit any of the below-described preformance parameters, you first need to edit track - Press the button. The LED above the Edit Track - button lights as a signal that you are in the Edit Track mode. The Edit Seq / Preset - LED also lights as a reminder that the Edit Track mode is a subset of the Sequence / Preset Edit mode. Push One of the bank buttons, the corresponding Sequence / Preset appears Edit Mode screen.

ET 0

Volume / Pan Edit Track Press Edit Track / Screen 0th

In the top row of the display is the preset or sequence number, the number of the selected track and the playback status. Space

Track #

Play Status

PRESET 01 Trk1 V = 99 Pan = SOUND

Vol - Volume The Volume screen the volume for each track can be regulated be to the KS-32 internally and with expanders in the mixture vote. Range: 0 to 99 All tracks whose MIDI status is set to MIDI or BOTH, send MIDI Volume data (controller 7) with exactly the displayed value when this parameter is edited. Send sequencer and preset tracks Also, the set volume when a sequence or a preset is selected.

Pan - Panorama The Pan-Sceen the sound of a track is assigned to the stereo image. If a track on SOUND, the panoramic setting from the true corresponding sound program, as described in the Edit Sound, Output Bank has been set. Any other setting overrules this Setting and ALL voices are treated equally. Range: -98 (far left) to +99 (far right). +00 Is exactly the middle in Stereo image. The lowest value is SOUND - the original setting the sound will be input.

8 - 10

Page 149 KS-32 user guide ET 1

Part 8 - Presets

Output Edit Track

Press Edit Track / Screen. 1

PRESET 01 Trk1 Output = CONTROL

Output Normally, the different voices of the sound are the three effect allocated for. On this screen, you can exceed this preference . vote This is especially useful when the effect in a performance Preset does not match any of the sounds. The possible settings are: • DRY all voices run dry by the effect. • FX1 sets FX2 Voices on FX1; FX1 and DRY are not affected. • FX2 sets FX1 Voices on FX2; FX2 and DRY are not affected • VOICE the normal setting of the sound is maintained. • CONTROL the normal setting of the sound is maintained. Controller data is fed to the effect part. This is automatic adjustment when a sound is imported.

ET 2

KeyRange Edit Track

Press Edit Track / Screen. 2

PRESET 01 Trk1 KeyRange = C2 C8

Low Key

High Key

Key-Range Each track has its own range in which sounds like his sound. With These parameters can be used to implement simple key splits, to complex master-keyboard setups. With Key Range determines which Notes via MIDI-transmitted or processed locally in the KS-32. You can split the keyboard up to eight times by all eight tracks program for each one zone. In addition, these zones can also any overlap, which can result in interesting sound mixes. Area:

A0 to C8

8-11

Page 150 Part 8 - Presets

KS-32 user guide The following figure shows an example of how three tracks with varying range overlap, the piano is mixed and partially overlapped by the cello (below) and flute (above).

Cellos

Piano

Flute

To edit the range of a track: • Press Edit Track, Screen2. The value for the lowest key flashes. • Play your desired deepest button. Then flashes autocally the parameters for high-key. • Play the desired highest key. Both new values are now the display and the flashing stops. • If you want to change the setting, select the parameter meter just back on and try again. A change of the tonal range does not affect the playback of Sequencer track (although it has influence on the recording). Sequencer Tracks always play everything is included, no matter how the sound scope of this track is set. To note ranges from a Remove sequencer track, use the "Erase Key Range" Function in the Edit Seq / Preset, track Commands -Bank (See Section 10 Sequence edit functions) .

Warning : If you have accidentally set the highest among the lowest key is the track can not be heard. To correct this, select the Key Range Parameters again and set the limits again.

ET 3

Transpose Edit Track

Press Edit Track / Screen. 3

PRESET 01 Trk2 Transpose = + 0 +00

Octave

Halftone

Transpose Each track is in his pitch in octave or semitone changed (transposed) are. This is true both for their own voices the KS-32, as well as sent via MIDI notes.

8-12

Page 151 KS-32 user guide

Part 8 - Presets Area:

Octave parameter Halftone parameters

-4 To +4 octaves -11 To +11 semitones

In Sequencer mode can use the Transpose parameter in all tracks Real time be transposed without manipulated the data directly in the track lose.

Warning :

ET 4

You should make sure that you track the status of MIDI or BOTH have never transpose while keys are pressed or the Sequencer is running. This could lead to "hanging notes" - that sounds, where the "Note Off" event is missing.

MIDI Channel Edit Track

Press Edit Track / Screen. 4

PRESET 01 Trk01Chan = 03 Prog = 001

MIDI channel

MIDI program number

Chan - MIDI Channel With this screen, you choose which MIDI channel the track Sending or receiving data. It is important to understand the difference,

how this parameter on sending and receiving determined. Compare See also the information about System • MIDI Edit mode and Sequencer practice. Transmit Determines are on which MIDI channel data sent. MIDI data is only sent when the track the MIDI Status BOTH, MIDI or * EXT * has. Receive

Determines on which MIDI channel for a specific Sequencer track MIDI data is received when under System • MIDI, Screen 6 "MIDI Mode = MULTI or MONO B" is selected. In POLY or MONO-A mode, the KS-32 always receives no matter what set at its base channel in the tracks has been. Individual preset tracks do not receive on different MIDI channels. For the presets is a pure Transmission function.

Range: MIDI channels 1 to 16

Note:

If more than one track to the same MIDI channel have only receives the Track with the lowest number.

8-13

Page 152 Part 8 - Presets ET 4

KS-32 user guide

MIDI Program Edit Track

Press Edit Track / Screen. 4

Prog - MIDI program number With this screen, you can determine which program change command is sent via MIDI when the track is selected. If the MIDI track status to "LOCAL", no program is for this track alternately sent. If a different track, preset, a different sequence or Selected song sends the KS-32 program change commands for Tracks with status BOTH, MIDI or * EXT *. Usually appears the number of the internal KS-32 sounds here. This Number is set automatically when a sound from the Sound Bank is selected. Will replace track sound a new sound in a Track used, thus automatically change the program number. You can at this point, any other MIDI program Enter the number and thus overrides the default. As a result, changes Although the sound of a connected MIDI device, but not the internal KS-32 sound. This is a handy way combinations of internal and external sounds to try. Range: 001-128 (MIDI program numbers 0 to 127)

Program change in the KS-32 The sounds in the different groups are all sound the program numbers 000 - 079 associated, said at the MIDI Out of the KS-32 also MIDI Bank Select messages and special ENSONIQ -Bank "Tax" Program Change message is sent when the Sound Group (INT, ROM, or CARD A CARD B) is changed. • Internal RAM Sounds (INT banks) have the numbers 001 bis 079th • Cartridge programs (CRT banks) have the numbers 001 bis 079th • Internal ROM programs (ROM banks) have also number 001 to 079th • The drum sounds send the program numbers 080-099.

ENSONIQ Bank's special "tax" Program Change commands The manner, such as program changes from the KS-32 are received, is somewhat more complicated than in some other systems, because the KS-32 the number of sounds available immediately to the possible MIDI Program change far exceeds. Therefore, the KS-32 uses the last

four program change messages (124-127) to determine how to understand the following program changes are (the numbers refer to again on the MIDI messages actually sent). The following Table shows the effect of these four special commands:

8 - 14

Page 153 KS-32 user guide

Part 8 - Presets for Program Change Currency: 124 125 126 127

select the following program Change Currency: 000..079 - INT Sounds 000..079 - ROM Sounds 000..079 - CARD A Sounds 000..079 - CARD B sounds

These particular "control" commands always need only once to be sent. All of the following program changes are just as treated again to follow such a command.

Note :

Program Change 080 -099 choose always at the ready drum kit.

Selecting a new sequence / song effect via MIDI There is a special command under the program change only the MULTI mode is processed. With him are sound and effect called together and placed in the respective track. If a Program Change 123 on any of the selected MIDI channels is received, takes the subsequent program changes the corresponding effect of the sound simultaneously with, and replaces the previous sequence or song effect. This is the only way to automatically Change effects in a song, unless by hand or by Calling another sequence. This can be useful when the KS-32 operates with an external sequencer. This special program change 123 has no effect on how other program changes are understood. If one of the "tax" Program change numbers for the same sound used to send this between the 123er and the actual exchange program.

Note : ET 5

All KS-32 program changes are displayed 001-128 and processed, transmitted via MIDI, however, as 000 to 127.

MIDI Status Edit Track

Press Edit Track / Screen. 5

PRESET 01 Trk01Status = BOTH

8-15

Page 154 Part 8 - Presets

KS-32 user guide

MIDI Status This screen determines the MIDI status of a track. The four possibilities options are: • BOTH buttons, controller etc. are transferred internally and via MIDI. Incoming MIDI data to control internal sounds. LOCAL • The track plays only internal sounds and does not send via MIDI. Incoming MIDI data to control internal sounds. • MIDI

Buttons, controller, etc. are sent via MIDI, if on the Keyboard is played. However, internal sounds are not controlled. Incoming MIDI data to control internal sounds. This status is with the LOCAL OFF other Keyboards comparable. Use this level when they are pure Want to have MIDI tracks, except for the sequencer or direct playing of expanders. Is the MIDI status for a Track active, the display instead of the program name "MIDI CHAN #" to show which channel just is sent. (Assuming the parameter MIDI TRACK NAMES under System • MIDI, Screen 9 is OFF; see Part 3 - System • MIDI settings ).

• * * EXT Like the MIDI status, except that incoming MIDI data not be processed. This is useful when the KS-32 Keyboard Box as an external sequencer is used with different expanders. In addition, you mute tracks with this status when the KS-32 used as a multi-mode tone in MULTI mode will. As a result, the number of channels can be reduced to the KS-32 reacts. The table below summarizes again, like what status acts:

Track status =

BOTH LOCAL

MIDI

* EXT *

The keyboard plays the internal sounds

Yes

The keyboard sends MIDI

Yes

Sequencer tracks (Play pressed) play internal sounds

Yes

Sequencer tracks (Play pressed) play via MIDI

Yes

Incoming MIDI data play internal sounds

Yes

Yes Yes

Yes No

8-16

Page 155 KS-32 user guide ET 6

Part 8 - Presets

Pressure Edit Track

Press Edit Track / Screen. 6

PRESET 01 Trk01Pressure = CHANNEL

Pressure - Aftertouch The Pressure Screen gives them the opportunity for each track the Aftertouch way to determine. This parameter determines which Aftertouch kind received by each track. It also controls whether Aftertouch to be sent internally or externally. Remember: The Keyboard of the KS-32 sends only channel aftertouch received are

However, channel aftertouch and polyphonic aftertouch via MIDI. • NONE - There are no aftertouch receive data in the sequencer recorded or transmitted from the keyboard of the KS-32. • KEY - In this mode, the KS-32 receives the most expressive probably MIDI controller - polyphonic aftertouch. This means that Independent Modulation for each key. Is a sequencer track-KEY set are polyphonic aftertouch data from an external MIDI keyboard in Sequencer recorded, not when the corresponding sound this recycled. When set to KEY the keyboard of the KS-32 does not send Aftertouch. • CHANNEL - This is the ordinary aftertouch, the Channel Aftertouch. With channel aftertouch always be all tones of a Modulated chord, even if only a key is pressed stronger. How the Mod is Channel Aftertouch also a "global" controller, acting on the entire keyboard. If a sequencer track on CHANNEL is transmitted channel aftertouch from the KS-32 Keyboard and recorded by the sequencer and use MIDI to each MIDI channel routed. To determine what type of aftertouch processes a MIDI device, you should look at its MIDI implementation detail. Best set the KS-32 exactly as the receiving MIDI device.

8-17

Page 156 Part 8 - Presets ET 7

KS-32 user guide

Sustain Edit Track

Press Edit Track / Screen. 7

PRESET 01 Trk01Sustain = ON

Sustain Pedal The Sustain parameter determines which tracks the sustain pedal react and what not. This affects the angechlossene pedal (FtswR = SUSTAIN under System • MIDI, Screen 2 ) exactly as shown incoming MIDI sustain data (controller # 64). There are two Positions: ON and OFF. • ON • OFF

Sustain data affect all notes in the range of that track. Sustain data has no effect in this track.

It would be useful, for example, the sustain data from a bass track filter out (OFF) if you have programmed a keyboard split. Then you can play the bass staccato (because the Sustain parameter for This track is set to OFF), while the chords in the upper keyboard Half can be kept with the pedal.

ET 8

Timbre Edit Track

Press Edit Track / Screen 8

PRESET 01 Trk01Timbre = 00

Timbre The timbre parameter is an easy way to sound character to change a sound, without directly intervene in the sound parameters to have. This performance parameters using the data entry control or Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons to control all companies sound different aspects, depending on how the programmer has used the modulator.

8-18

Page 157 KS-32 user guide

Part 8 - Presets As timbral modulation source can be used at any location where Modulation sources can be freely addressed. Timbre with paraparameters such as filter cutoff, waveform modulation LFO intensity or others are connected. It is worth experimenting with this parameter, to see how the programmer has used it. Area:

00 to 99

All tracks with MIDI Status MIDI, * EXT * or BOTH transmit a MIDI control message controller (controller # 71) with the corresponding Value if this parameter is changed.

ET 9

Release Edit Track

Press Edit Track / Screen 9

PRESET 01 Trk01Release = +00

Release The release parameter gives you the option of the release time of a To increase sound in a track or decrease ("Release" is the Decay of the sound after the key is released). This becomes especially good if you want to change the release time of a sound without having to engage in the actual sound parameters. Area:

-64 To +64

Higher values increase the release time. Lower values reduce the release time.

All tracks with MIDI Status MIDI, * EXT * or BOTH transmit a MIDI control message controller (controller # 72) with the corresponding Value if this parameter is changed.

8-19

Page 159 158 KS-32 user guide

Part 9 - Sequencer Basics

Part 9 - Sequencer Basics â&#x20AC;˘ In this part of the sequencer of the KS-32 is presented with all Information that you need to work with the sequencer to can. More specific functions in Section 10 - Sequencer Edit Functions treated. Introduction - What you need to know about presets ................................. 9-1 Digital sequencer ................................................ ................................... 9 - 2 What is a Sequence? .................................................. ............................ 9 - 3 What's that sound? .................................................. ................................... 9 - 3 The sequencer "drive functions" ............................................ ......... 9-4 The sequencer status .............................................. ................................. 9-5 Sequencer and Song benches ............................................. ......................... 9-5 Selecting a sequence / a song ............................................ .... 9-6 Playing a sequence / a song ............................................ 9-6 How to create a new sequence ............................................ .............. 9-7 How to create a new song How to delete the entire sequencer memory ................................. 9-8 Recording a sequence ............................................... ........................... 9 - 9 "Punch In" in a track ........................................... ............................... 9-11 Play an active sequence / try Sounds .................... 9-12 Recording MIDI tracks ............................................. ..................... 9-12 Track volume functions - mixing, mute, solo ......... 9-13 The Song Mode .............................................. ........................................ 9-15 Effect - switching in Song mode ........................................... 9-15 Song Tracks ............................................... ................................... 9-17 Sequence control of tracks in the Song Mode .......................... 9-18 Blending sequence and song tracks in Song Mode ....... 9-19 Notes to the mixdown mode ............................................ 9 - 20

Introduction - What you need to know about presets ENSONIQ was the first company to a versatile multi-track sequencer has built into a synthesizer. The KS-32 with its 16 track Sequencer is the logical further development of this technology . The KS-32 sequencer offers some ways you likely to be of a computerized software sequencer would expect. The KS-32 connects with the advantages of the integrated system. The KS-32 is despite its high performance easy to use - you have your synthesizers, sequencers, and your MIDI master keyboard directly at your fingertips in a single device. This makes ENSONIQ ' s contribution for digital music recording so intuitive and efficient. If you are the same entered with this chapter because it does not can be expected to work with the sequencer, you should still back again, scroll and Part 8 - Presets read. Contains the preset part important information about tracks (tracks), and the setting of Performance and MIDI parameters together an important Vorrausrequisite for the understanding of the sequencer is.

9-1

Page 160 Part 9 - Sequencer Basics

KS-32 user guide

Therefore, we recommend that you first read the section "Presets", and then familiarize yourself with the sequencer other parameters in this Part to be treated. That is the only way to get the right access

Find this versatile element of the KS-32. Digital Sequencer Multitrack tape recorders have numerous band tracks that you magnetic can record shows complex information. A sequencer

simulates this by musical information into a computer Store "picks up". If these sequencer - tracks played, can the recorded information about your family either through the internal sound the KS-32, but also be played via external MIDI devices. Expander with multi-mode then you can even multiple sounds simultaneously Play on different channels, then each channel has a trace of Sequencer takes over. A sequencer only records "commands" instead of real tones on. This means that the recording draws no loss of sound by itself, no matter as is often dubbed a track or reinstated. It is important that you always have in mind that a sequencer only recording what you play. The memory of the sequencer to work based on events (key press, modulation, program changes, etc.), while the memory of a tape (the tape that is) always a fixed recording time is bound. That is, a sequencer needed for 100 notes always the same Space, whether you're minutes these notes in one or ten have played. When you press a key, the sequencer records a Command keystroke (key down) on. Then, the time is measured, until you release the key. Then there is a command for the Releasing (Key Up). The time between two events thus has no Effect on the memory consumption. Compare that with a Tape machine. When tape is time always the deciding factor. It always requires the same amount of tape for a minute, regardless of whether or hundred notes have been played. You could say the band is working linear, it is after a fixed time consumed - while a sequencer memory is dynamic - it is uses only as much as is required. If this difference have understood, it will be easier, with the sequencer deal with it. For example, while relatively little note events Space consuming, controller information (such as pitch bend, Modulation or aftertouch) always a flood of Events for the Sequencer, which can consume memory very quickly. When you So you want to try one more track to be incorporated into a sequence take, if only little space is left, you know that you need to save more with controllers.

9-2

Page 161 KS-32 user guide

Part 9 - Sequencer Basics

What is a Sequence? A sequence in the KS-32 is a combination of eight independent Tracks and an effects program. Each track has its own sound and a set of different track parameters (volume, pan, MIDI Channel, etc.) which are stored together with the sequence. A sequence is (although the change of a fixed length at any time leaves), which is determined by the length of the first shot. An existing sequence can be as long or short as you want (within the limits of the memory of course). Each sequence has a 16-digit name entered when creating can be. Dieer name at any time in the Seq Commands - Bank ( Bank 4 ) can be changed in the Sequence / Preset Edit mode. If you select a new sequence, each track sends a MIDI Program change message on his MIDI channel, as well as a MIDI Loudness information, unless the track status is set to LOCAL.

What's that sound? In the Song mode are sequences in individual steps (Steps) to a Song linked. A song can consist of 99 steps consist, in turn, each 99 reps may have. Within a step may Tracks be transposed or muted.

But a song of the KS-32 is much more than a chain of sequences. Each Song has another eight more tracks that are completely independent of the Tracks in the sequences. Each song track has its own sound and all track / performance Parameters, as well as a sequence track. The length of the song tracks arises from the overall length of the steps and the number of repetition ments that make up the song. You can song tracks on the track buttons Select when a song is active. This means that if you added a couple of sequences and to have linked a song, you can still eight more linear tracks record the length of the entire song. You have 16 tracks, with which you can work (more about this in the section on song tracks).

9-3

Page 162 Part 9 - Sequencer Basics

KS-32 user guide

The sequencer "drive functions" The three buttons below the Sequencer area to work as start, stop and Record buttons of the sequencer. In addition to these three buttons to the supplied footswitch (SW-6) or the additional switch of the SW 5 / SW-10 Doppelfußpedals (accessory) for starting and stopping the Use the sequencer when all hands are free ( see Part 3 System • MIDI Control) .

Record Stop

Play

Continue

Aux. Foot Switch

If the auto punch feature is turned off, • is play the currently selected sequence or song from the beginning started. • is the sequencer with Stop • Continue stopped (by pressing the key suppressed when the sequencer is running) or the sequencer will play a specific point on (when the key at a standstill sequencer is pressed). • The foot switch performs the function of Stop • Continue, button. • Press play and to record , the sequencer starts over with recording. • Press Stop and Record , the sequencer of the site begins to record where it was last stopped. • Press Record , while the sequencer is running, it switches to "Punch In" mode and starts recording as soon as you start play. If the auto punch function is activated, the sequencer takes only within half of the points on which under the Edit Times in Locate set -Bank have been.

9-4

Page 163 KS-32 user guide

Part 9 - Sequencer Basics

The sequencer status In many sequencer Banks is in the upper right corner of the display information about the sequencer status . The sequencer is located always in one of these states: • STOP - The sequencer is • PLAY - The currently selected sequence is running (sequence selected) • SNGS - Song Stop: The sequencer is (song selected) • SNGP - Song Play: The currently selected song is played (song selected) • REC - first record on the selected track • ODUB - Overdub: is on a recorded track another shot made • play (lower line) - The count is running before the sequencer in PLAY REC or ODUB changes • rec (lower line) - Record-Standby mode: Once you play start the sequencer enters REC (only in the first frame) • odub (lower line) - "punch-in" Standby: When you play start the sequencer switches ODUB • MREC (lower line) - MIDI sync recording standby mode: same as above is the sequencer in recording standby, however, by MIDI sync (CLOCK = MIDI Control in the bank) and expected MIDI clock data so that the recording starts. • audp - Audition Play. In this status the sequencer switches automatically when the end of the sequence is reached (provided LOOP = ON). Then the sequence proceeds, together with the new Track, until you stop • Continue or enter • Save button. In the Display is then "Press ENTER to keep track NEW." • AUDS - Audition Stop: Appears when out of Audition Play stop the sequencer. In order for this control status in the normal To come Mode, you must tell the KS-32 First is that the new To keep recording (See also PLAY / KEEP screen later in this part).

Sequencer and Song benches If the Select Seq / preset press button takes you to the Sequences / Presets Select mode. Now you can about the ten Bank Buttons (numbered 0 to 9) sequences or select songs. The Banks 0 to 6 can always choose to sequences while the pews 7 to 9, the Songs included. Each bank ten places for sequences / presets / Songs that on the screen buttons below the bank keys be called. Memory locations that contain no sequences or songs are with, "* EMPTY SEQ / PSET" or "EMPTY SONG" marked. In the upper line shows the position of the current sequence / the songs / presets in Memory. If you select an empty location and enter • Save button the function "Create New Sequence" or "Create New Song" called (see later in this section).

9-5

Page 164 Part 9 - Sequencer Basics

KS-32 user guide

Selecting a sequence / a song • Press Select Seq / preset , and then a bank key, numbered from 0 to 9 to a Sequence / Song Bank to select. • Press the Screen button 0-9 to a sequence or song to select the bank.

Playing a sequence / a song Select a sequence, then press the Play button in the sequencer Part. The sequence is running out. Space of the current sequence SEQ 00 Tempo = 120 Name of the sequence which will follow

Sequence 01

Flashing cursor While a sequence is running, you can already select the next. In the bottom line of the display then the name of the new sequence. Only when the old sequence is quite expired, the sequencer switches to new sequence. Now the display changes in the upper left corner. In this manner, sequences can be real-time supply any socialize, while the sequencer is running. In the display you can always see which Sequence is currently playing (top left), and what follows (lower line). Note that just for a change of the effect of output is interrupted in order to load the new algorithm.

9-6

Page 165 KS-32 user guide

Part 9 - Sequencer Basics

How to create a new sequence A new sequence is constructed as follows: • Press the Select Seq / Preset button in the Sequence / Presets Select to access mode. • The Bank and screen buttons to select a still empty storage space to. Remember, though, that the banks 0 to 6 and 7 to 9 sequences Songs included. The display looks like this: PRESET ## LOC = ## * EMPTY SEQ / PSET *

• Press the Enter • Save - button. The display will then:

New Sequence Location = ##

With the data entry control and Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons You can now scroll through all the empty memory slots. • Have you found a job, press the right cursor . In the Display shows: Time Signature = 4.4

With the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor area to set the time signature. With the Right cursor reached the second value. Again Right Cursor or Enter • Save button and the display shows: New Name = Sequence ##

Again, use the Data Entry knob or the Up • Yes / Down • NoCursor buttons to enter a name for the new sequence. • Now that you have space, time signature and name for the new sequence found, press only once Enter • Save to the Process to complete. The display will then: "Command Successful!"

9-7

Page 166 Part 9 - Sequencer Basics

KS-32 user guide

How to create a new song: • Press the Select Seq / Preset button in the sequencer / Presets Select to access mode. • The Bank and screen buttons to select a free song memory to (banks 7-9). • Press the Enter • Save button. The display shows: New Song Location = ##

With the data entry control and Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons You can now all empty song presets scroll (with a new sequence, these are the empty sequence presets). • Have you found a job, press the right cursor. In the Display shows: New Name = Song ##

Again, use the Data Entry knob or the Up • Yes / Down • NoCursor buttons to enter a name for the new song. • Now that you have space, time signature and name for the new song found, press only once Enter • Save to the Process to complete. The display will then: "Command Successful!"

How to delete the entire sequencer memory If you want to delete all sequences and songs in the KS-32,

If you want to delete all sequences and songs in the KS-32, make sure first that you show all important data of a Have secured card or via MIDI. Then: • Press Edit Seq / preset , if you do not already in the sequencer Edit Fashion is. The LED above the button lights up. • Select by Bank 1 , the control - to the Bank. • Press the Touch Screen 7 - button. The display will read: "Press ENTER to Reinit Sequencer " • Press Enter • Save . The KS-32 asks: "Erase Sequencer Memory? " • Press Up • Yes or Enter • Save . The KS-32 removes all presets, Sequences and songs. Then again the empty sequence and a blank Song in the memory locations 00 and 70. (It is always a sequence and a song in memory).

9-8

Page 167 KS-32 user guide

Part 9 - Sequencer Basics

Recording a sequence Here we will describe how a new sequence from scratch arises. First, we focus on the sequencer for the KS-32 alone. Then follows the treatment of external MIDI devices.

1) Create a new sequence: • Follow the instructions here in this part, as a new sequence is applied. • Press one of the track buttons. The display now reads: Trk01 INT 01 <Sound name>

2) Selecting a track: • Track 1 is already defined and selected (a track is always selected), and with the current sound is. All other tracks are still -UNDEFINED- (not defined). • To start recording on another track as track 1, press the appropriate track button. This will turn this track defined and also occupied with the current sound. Otherwise you keep Simply Track 1 and start from there with the recording.

3) Looking from a matching sound: • Press the Replace-Track Sound - button. • Select a sound quite normal on the bench and Screen Buttons as you also do it otherwise. Each new sound is immediately to the Track taken over and replaces the previous one. • Press the Replace-track sound button again to the Replace-track sound mode to leave.

4) Check the "click" and "Countoff" Settings: • Press Edit Seq / preset . Select the Click -Bank of ( Bank 2 ) and then Screen 0 . On this screen, the built-in metronome set. Select the "click" parameter and set "Click = RECORD" field. Then the metronome is only while recording hear. • Go to the Countoff screen by the Locate button press ( Bank 1 ) and then Screen 0 . Set "Countoff = RECORD" a. Then listen to before each shot one bar count.

5) recording the first track: The length of the first track sets the length of the sequence. That'S Why this recording is a little different from all of the following. • Press and hold the Record button firmly and press play it. The Click Track can be heard now. The first quarter of each measure is emphasized. The Tempo parameter is automatically selected.

9-9

Page 168 Part 9 - Sequencer Basics

KS-32 user guide

• Adjust the tempo ( Data Entry knob or Up • Yes / Down • NoCursor ). The clock. with which you began, the clock is automatically 1 Sequence. • Press Stop • Continue (or additional footswitch) to the To stop recording. The display will read "Keep Trk1 first ## bars?". • Press Up • Yes cursor , if you want to keep track. The sets automatically and the length of the sequence determined, or • Press Down • No-cursor to delete the track again and start again.

6) Record Other Tracks: If you have decided to * YES *, of which all further Record the same scheme, including track 1. The length of the Sequence is now defined (by the length of the first track). All following tracks will automatically have the same length. • Press the Track 2 - button and select a second track (or let the first one if you want to re-record). The name and all the track parameters of the previous tracks are taken there. • Find out a sound. As described in step 3, you can Replace with the sound feature the sound of your choice into the active trace copy. • Press and hold the Record button is pressed while you press the Play Button to start recording. It starts with a one bar (Assuming Countoff = RECORD or CLICK) count-in and the Sequencer switches to Record mode. All you will play was added until: 1) is reached at the end of the sequence, or 2) the Stop • Continue button press (or additional footswitch). • At the end of the sequence, the KS-32 enters the Audition Play Mode (If loop = ON). Now appears the Keep OLD / NEW screen: Press ENTER to KEEP NEW TRACK

• If the Down • No cursor , press button, you will hear the track, as it was before the last shot. The display then is "OLD" instead "NEW". This is especially useful when trying to distinguish between old compare and new version before you decide which one you be retained. • Press the Up • Yes-cursor to hear your new recording. • If you enter • Save button while the display shows "OLD", the retain old version and the new moves in the trash. Was the track previously empty, then it is empty again. • If you enter • Save button while "NEW" appears in the display is keep the new version and everything else replaces it.

9 - 10

Page 169 KS-32 user guide

Part 9 - Sequencer Basics The Keep OLD / NEW screen appears after each shot and after each Edit operation. So you always have the opportunity to compare before you have to decide. You will notice that this is a very outstanding feature of the KS-32 is, if you at a reception works.

"Punch In" in a track

"Punch In" in a track The KS-32 provides two ways to insert into a track record ("Punch In"). If the Auto Punch function is set to Off, you can do this manually by playing. If Auto Punch "On", goes the KS-32 automatically into the receptacle over, at the point in the Locate -Bank is defined (see auto punch in this part). To enter manually into the receptacle (Auto Punch = OFF): • Press the Track button for the track you want to record. • Press Play to play the sequence or the song. • Press Record . The KS-32 is now on standby overdub "Odub" appears at the top right of the display and the sequencer waits Your use. • Begin to play whenever you want. Once you begin changes the KS-32 in the recording and record what you play, where everything was before the punch-in is maintained. With Stop • Continue or Aux foot switch you can start recording cancel. Then after that old material is preserved. • Press Stop • Continue . Then appears the Keep NEW / OLD Screen, you have seen it before. You can now again compare the old and new version before you decide which to keep. To automatically get on or off in a track (when in Control Bank AUTO PUNCH = ON): • Set the Locate the punch-in and punch-out points a -Bank, so as described in the corresponding place. • Press Record / Play to start the sequencer. The sequence is played without data record, up to the defined Punch In Point. You can play up to that point already. • If the punch-in point is reached, the sequencer automatically switches to the Recording. Now, everything you play, taken to Punch-out point. • When you reach the punch-out point of the sequencer switches to Keep checking the NEW / OLD screen. • you compare again before you decide what saved should be.

9-11

Page 170 Part 9 - Sequencer Basics

KS-32 user guide

If Auto Punch is turned on, only within the set Recorded points. No matter how you shoot. If you, for example, Play press, and then only record , the KS-32 is ready for your first Notes before it goes into the recording. But even then only within the locate points. Outside these limits will not be included. If you selected Record mode LOOPED, while car Switched Punch, the sequencer increases with each iteration of A sequence at the locate points and out, until you stop • Continue push.

Note:

When the foot is defined as the START / STOP footswitch can be played by the sequencer overdub standby mode ("odub" lowercase) with the foot in the overdub record mode switch ("ODUB" uppercase). This way you can "free-hand" enter without a defined punch-in / out time in the recording.

Play an active sequence / try Sounds Every time you switch from sequencer mode in the Sound Mode (By pressing the Select Sound button press), invites the KS-32 the effect this sounds into the effects processor. The sequence effect is replaced. (Remember, though, that only one effect for all sounds is possible, even if you can determine the assignment individually.) If you select Sound button while the sequencer is running, or

Sound Mode Play button you will hear the sequence with the effect of Sounds. (The sequence is not changed, but you can Sequence with different effects listening.) If you now but when the sequencer is running in the Sequence / Preset fashion Switch sounds, but the effect of the first sound is maintained. You also have the sequencer sounds by double on the track be layered buttons. So you can create a melody with several Sounds to play the current sequence. It is recommended that the Replace sound feature to use if you are at want to change the sequencer sounds, which you can then live to play. Please read Part 8 - Presets .

Recording MIDI tracks When you have made all the settings, you can also MIDI Tracks record, as well as tracks with LOCAL or BOTH status. Tracks that are sent via MIDI will be treated the same way as internal tracks. Also apply to the working steps in advance this section are described. So stick to this way of working even with MIDI tracks.

9-12

Page 171 KS-32 user guide

Part 9 - Sequencer Basics For each new MIDI track: 1) Define the MIDI settings in the parameter bank, 2) Take the track on, and 3) Are you looking to Keep the NEW / OLD-screen version of the best. MIDI tracks using the track are layered together buttons. One You can in the mute tracks - Bank ( Bank 7 ) mute, just as other tracks. The Edit Track parameters such as volume, Key Range Transpose and can be used for MIDI tracks.

Note:

They will often take sequences with MIDI and LOCAL tracks. Then be sure that tracks only to play internal sounds, is always set to LOCAL (rather than BOTH). To avoid that MIDI Tone generator undesirable play.

Track volume functions - mixing, mute, solo If you have taken a couple tracks, be sure the Correct mix of tracks or sometimes one or two tracks want to listen alone. This is done in the mute tracks -Bank. Select a track with the track buttons and then press Edit Track . The KS-32 is now in the track edit mode. Now press the Screen 0 button. The display shows: SEQ 00 Trk01 V = 99 Pan = SOUND

From this screen, you can use the volume ratios of the individual Customize tracks your sequence. Press one after the respective Track buttons, and then adjust the volume. Press the mute tracks - Bank button ( Bank 7 ) about the track To achieve Mute parameter. Here, the individual Tracks mute or solo hear. SEQ 00 Trk01 Status = -PP-M-PM

12345678 Track

9-13

Page 172 Part 9 - Sequencer Basics

KS-32 user guide

Press a track button or use the left / right Cursor keys to select a track for editing. The dataEntry knob and up â&#x20AC;˘ Yes / No â&#x20AC;˘ Down cursor buttons you can now individual tracks to mute or solo switch. P is called Play, M stands for Mute and S means Solo (see also the treatment of the track-mute status in Part 10 - Programming sequencer for further details).

9-14

Page 173

KS-32 user guide

Part 9 - Sequencer Basics

The song mode The song mode opens the door to the true qualities of the KS-32 as Keyboard Studio . In the Song mode can be individual sequences strung together. A Song consists of steps - each with a sequence and the information how often this is to be repeated, and which Traces on or should be switched off. In addition, each track be transposed. As Song steps are edited, is in part 10 Sequencer programming . But that's not all: Each KS-32 song also has its own Effects setup (see below) and eight additional tracks that of the Sequence tracks are completely independent. You have a total of 16 tracks. You can decide for yourself what you want in a Record sequence and what was added later in a song track should be. The song tracks are described on the following page.

Effect - switching in Song mode As you will have already noticed, there is always a small Delay when you switch from one sound to another, thereby the effect changes. The reason is that the effect of a processor Moment needed to change the algorithm. New software Information to be loaded here. The same thing happens when you switch sequences. Each sequence has a own effects setup. If you select a sequence, the other a Used effect, there is also a brief interruption. When you play a song that can be a problem - has a new song step a different effect, there is a brief interruption tion to the audio outputs. For this problem, the KS-32 holds a few solutions available. The parameter "song Uses effect from = SEQUENCES / SONG" in the Control Bank determines which effect can be heard in a song: • When "song Uses effect from = SEQUENCES" is set, at each new song step, the effect of the relevant sequence loaded, which a brief interruption brings with it (unless both sequences have the same basic program). • When "song Uses effect from = SONG" is set, the effect is the was saved with the song, the same for all sequences used. So: a song - an effect = no interruptions. This parameter setting is saved along with the song chert. When you create a new song is first "song uses Effect from = SONG "set. As a result, interruptions can be prevented. But then all sequences have the same effect.

9-15

Page 174 Part 9 - Sequencer Basics

KS-32 user guide

If you "song Uses effect from = SEQUENCES" selected as the setting have, you can still avoid interruptions: • Use whenever possible the same effect basic program for each sequence in the song. Even with different parameter settings. • Program the beginning of the sequence in which the effect of changes, a short break or you used a one-bar empty sequence, the only the effect is changed. For all of the following sequences, they choose the same Effect.

9-16

Page 175 KS-32 user guide

Part 9 - Sequencer Basics

Song Tracks A song in the KS-32 is more than just a chain of sequences. Do You Have once consecutively set a sequence of sequences can provide record eight tracks over the length of the entire song. This Song Tracks are independent of the other tracks: They have their own Sounds and track parameters. The length of the song tracks depends on the Length from the song. Let's say you have designed a song, as in Part 10 described. In our example, we take the simplest case: • You have added three sequences, each recorded with eight tracks and combines them into a song. • Step 1 sequence 01 (4 bars long) with a repetition; • Step 2 sequence is 02 (8 bars long) and runs from once; • Step 3 sequence is 03 (4 bars long) with a repetition. This song would look like this: Sequence 1 Sequence Track 1 Sequence Track 2 Sequence Track 3 Sequence Track 4 Sequence Track 5 Sequence Track 6 Sequence Track 7 Sequence Track 8

Sequence 2 Sequence Track 1 Sequence Track 2 Sequence Track 3 Sequence Track 4 Sequence Track 5 Sequence Track 6 Sequence Track 7 Sequence Track 8 Song length

Sequence 3 Sequence Track 1 Sequence Track 2 Sequence Track 3 Sequence Track 4 Sequence Track 5 Sequence Track 6 Sequence Track 7 Sequence Track 8

If you have selected the song, you can use the track buttons a whole new set with eight other tracks to see. These are the song tracks. (If you are not sure what you see, pay attention to the track LEDs. You blink when displayed Sequence tracks in Song Mode be). This song tracks look like this:

Sequence 1 Sequence Track 1 Sequence Track 2 Sequence Track 3 Sequence Track 4 Sequence Track 5 Sequence Track 6 Sequence Track 7 Sequence Track 8

Song Sequence 2 Sequence Track 1 Sequence Track 2 Sequence Track 3 Sequence Track 4 Sequence Track 5 Sequence Track 6 Sequence Track 7 Sequence Track 8 Song Track 1 Song Track 2 Song Track 3 Song Track 4 Song Track 5 Song Track 6 Song Track 7 Song Track 8 Song length

Sequence 3 Sequence Track 1 Sequence Track 2 Sequence TrackSequence 3 Sequence Track Tracks 4 Sequence Track 5 Sequence Track 6 Sequence Track 7 Sequence Track 8 Song Tracks

Song tracks are treated exactly as Sequence tracks whose length equivalent to the length of all the sequences that make up the song. The length of a song track, the length of the song at the time when

9-17

Page 176 Part 9 - Sequencer Basics

KS-32 user guide

the first song track was recorded. If you subsequently the Change song and change the length, it has no more influence on the Length of the song tracks. The also remains the same. • You can check the sound of a song tracks as usual with the REPLACE Track sound function switch. • You can normally receive (with Record and Play ). Align As per the explanations in this section. The only difference is that a song track is always associated with the whole song. • You can edit song tracks with all edit-track features in Part 8 will be described. Select an Edit Track function from the Song mode out the corresponding song track is edited. • From the Mute -Track -Bank you can also solo- or Song Tracks mute, just as in Sequence tracks.

Sequence control of tracks in the Song mode If a song is on that determine the "Song Edit Tracks display setting played "parameter in the Control - Bank, which on the track and giant screens Edit track parameters can be seen. • If you have "Song Edit Tracks Displayed = SONG" is set, be on the track and Edit Track giant screens displayed song tracks. All changes apply only to the song tracks. • If you select "Song Edit Tracks Displayed = SEQ," have set are the tracks of the individual sequences shown, from which the song there. Any changes to these tracks are not taken, when the next song step follows. If you are basically a sequence want to change, you must select the right sequence and then the Change parameters. If a song is on, and "Song Edit Tracks Displayed SEQ =" set flashed the track LEDs in order to remind you that the track data the currently selected sequence to be changed, and not the song tracks. Song tracks as tracks # 9 - 16 shown.

Note:

There is a shortcut to switch between "Song Edit Tracks Displayed = SEQ "and" Song Edit Tracks Displayed = switch SONG ": • Are you in the Sequence / Preset Edit mode, you can use a Double-click on any track button between Sequence and Song Tracks back and forth. You see Sequence tracks when the LEDs on the track buttons flash, and song tracks when it evenly . lights

9-18

Page 177 KS-32 user guide

Part 9 - Sequencer Basics

Blending sequence and song tracks in Song Mode If you have created and edited a song, you have the Rounding off the whole song yet your "mix". This can be Change volume and panning for each track independently and record. The data is not affected in the tracks; it is dedicated to a mixdown track created (actually part of a Song tracks is) on which the volume and pan data stored be. The whole thing always happens over the length of the entire song. You can show or hide any traces in this way and Programming interesting pan change.

To accommodate the volume and pan for Sequence tracks: • Select a song that contains the tracks you want to mix them. • Go to the Control - by the Bank Control - Press ( Bank 1 ) and the Record Mode ( Screen 1 ) "Record = MIXDOWN" ask. • Set the Song Edit Tracks Displayed parameter to "Song Edit Tracks Displayed = SEQ " • Press one of the track - to select the track buttons, the To be "mixed". If you have z. B. selected track 3, are the volume and pan of Track 3 each sequence of songs recorded. • Select the Edit Track mode by pressing the Edit Track button . Press Screen 0 contains the volume parameters (volume) for this Track. (Or panorama when you want to record.) • Press Record / Play . The KS-32 goes in the overdub mode. • Use the Data Entry knob or the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor can Now the volume (or pan) change parameters. Everything You make is recorded. • At the end of the song, or if you stop • Continue button appears Keep NEW / OLD screen. Here you can listen to the results, before you decide what you want to keep. • To mix a different track, press the track button and repeat the procedure.

To accommodate the volume and pan of a song tracks: • Select the song. • Go to the Control by the -Bank, Control push button ( Bank 1 ) and the Record Mode ( Screen 1 ) "Record = MIXDOWN" ask. • Set the Song Edit Tracks Displayed parameter to "Song Edit Tracks Displayed = SONG "(Note also that through double the track buttons also switch between sequence and song tracks and forth can. The corresponding LEDs flash when Song Tracks are selected. In addition, song tracks are always with # 9 Represented 16 while the Sequence tracks the # 1 - 8 are). • Press one of the track buttons to select the track, the To be "mixed". If you have z. B. selected track 3, Volume and Pan Song Track 3 (shown as track 11) recorded.

9-19

Page 178 Part 9 - Sequencer Basics

KS-32 user guide

• Select the Edit Track mode on by pressing the Edit Track button . Press Screen 0 contains the volume parameters (volume) for this Track. (Or panorama when you want to record.) • Press Record / Play . The KS-32 goes in the overdub mode. • Use the Data Entry knob or the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor can

Now the volume (or pan) change parameters. Everything You make is recorded. • At the end of the song, or if you stop • Continue button appears Keep NEW / OLD screen. Here you can listen to the results, before you decide what you want to keep. • To mix a different track, press the track button and repeat the procedure.

Notes to the mixdown mode Mixdown data for volume and pan in the song tracks in a special "ADD" Date Mode. The data are the other data added to the song tracks. This means: • Mixdown data are always listed in the corresponding song tracks taken, whether you mix a sequence or song track. • If you delete recorded volume and pan data and want resampling, you must first with the filter function in the Delete event bank the old data (see section 10 ). Otherwise it would create new Data was added, which overlap with the old (and Cause problems) would. • If you delete the song track, all mixdown data deleted. Notes, controller or program changes have no effect at mixdown data, but deleting the track (via the "Erase" command in the track Commands- Bank) also clears the mixdown information. If possible, you should mixdown function as the last step in the Use production chain. So only when all recordings and Length changes are complete.

Note:

There is another possibility, dynamic volume changes recorded. You can use the optional foot pedal CVP-1 volume Record data. To do this under System • MIDI / Screen 3 "Pedal = Volume # 7 "and make the changes in ADD mode on. This volume changes are recorded as MIDI controller # 7 names which are stored independently of the mixdown data.

9-20

Page 179 KS-32 user guide

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming The locate Bank .............................................. ....................................... 10 - 2 Sequence Locate ............................................... ............................ 10 - 2 Song Locate ............................................... ................................... 10-3 Seq-Punch-In - The use of the Auto Punch function ............. 10-4 Editing the times in the Song mode ........................................... ..10 - 5 Adjustment of the positions in real-time .......................................... 10-5 Seq-Punch-Out ............................................. ................................. 10-6 Auto Punch ............................................... .................................... 10-6 Tap Tempo ............................................... .................................... 10-6 Tempo - song tempo offset ........................................... .......... 10-6 The Control Bank .............................................. ..................................... 10-7 Loop ................................................. ............................................. 10-7 Step Entry ............................................... ...................................... 10-7 Record - The record mode ............................................ .......... 10-10 Auto Punch ............................................... .................................. 10-10 Song uses Effect from .............................................. ................... 10-10 Song Edit Tracks Displayed ........................................... ........... 10 - 11 Save Changes mode ............................................. ...................... 10-12 About the "Save Changes?" - Screen ........................................ .... 10-12 Total Sequencer Free memory (display only) ........................... 10 - 13 Reinitialize sequencer ............................................... ................. 10-14 The Click Bank .............................................. ....................................... 10-14 Click ................................................. ........................................... 10-14 Click-volume ............................................... .............................. 10-14

Tempo ................................................. ........................................ 10-15 The Song Bank - Song Edit functions ........................................ ... 10-16 Create-song ............................................... ................................. 10-16 Copy song ............................................... ................................... 10-17 Erase Song / Preset ............................................. .......................... 10-17 Song information ............................................... ......................... 10 - 18 Rename Song / Preset ............................................. ...................... 10 - 18 Copy Preset Data ............................................. ........................... 10 - 19 Edit the Song Steps - The Song Step Editor ............. 10 - 20 Editing Song steps - The Song Step Editor .......... 10-22 The Seq Commands Bank ............................................ ........................ 10-24 Create-Sequence / Preset ............................................. ................. 10-24 Copy Sequence ............................................... ............................ 10-25 Erase Sequence / Preset ............................................. ................... 10-26 Sequence information ............................................... .................. 10-26 Rename Sequence / Preset ............................................. ............... 10-27 Copy Preset Data ............................................. ........................... 10-27 Append Sequence ............................................... ........................ 10-28 Change Length - inserting and deleting bars ............ 10-29 The track Commands Bank ............................................ ..................... 10-31 Determination of the editing area - Track-range function .... 10-31 Event Edit Track ............................................. ........................... 10 - 32 Copy Track ............................................... .................................. 10-36 Erase Track ............................................... .................................. 10-37 Merge Track ............................................... ................................ 10-37 Transpose Track ............................................... .......................... 10-38 Shift Track ............................................... ................................... 10-39 Scale Track ............................................... .................................. 10-40 Filter Events ............................................... ................................ 10-41 Quantize-Track.....................................................................................10 - 42 Track Mute status ............................................. ................................... 10-43

10-1

Page 180 Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

KS-32 user guide

From the Seq / Preset Edit mode can be reached via the Bank - buttons ( Bank 0 - 7.) the different sequence edit functions. Locate

Control

Click

Song Cmds

Seq Cmds

Track Cmds

Quantize Track

Mute Tracks

Wave

Pitch

Env 1

LFO

Filter

Env 2

Amp

Output

The locate bank The locate database contains not only valuable sequencer - information, but also the pace - setting and the GOTO (Car Locator) Function.

Sequence / Song Locate Locate Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Locate (bank 0) / Screen 0th First we see the screen to locate as remains after dialing a Sequence appears. If you select a song on that screen looks slightly different (see below).

Sequence Locate Sequence space SEQ 00

Sequence Status STOP

Bar = 001 Beat = 04

In the upper left corner you can see the number of the current sequence. The sequencer status (Play, Stop or Record) is always in the right upper corner displayed.

Bar / Beat - The sequencer Goto function Using the Goto function you can quickly reach any point in

Jump to a sequence to record from there or just to play can. • Press the Enter • Save - button. Then the display shows: Press ENTER, goto Bar = 001 Beat = 01

10 - 2

Page 181 KS-32 user guide

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming • The measure number (Bar) flashes. With the Data Entry knob or the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor keys can now download the desired position be set. Use the left / right cursor can be between Measure number and beat (beat) switch back and forth. • Press the Enter • Save - key after entering the key. In the Display the main screen again. This Goto function you can quickly and easily repeatedly in a certain place the sequence jump - the position remains in effect until a is selected other sequence (or a new position is set). If the position is adjusted, sufficient pressing the Enter • Save button (on the Locate screen) to at this point jump. • Did you use the Goto function to a certain point come, you start the sequencer using the Stop button to get out of there to play. (The Stop button also functions as a Continue button. With start the sequence always starts from the beginning.) • If you want to record from that point, press and hold the Record Button, press to stop • Continue .

Song Locate If you have selected a song, the locate screen looks like this: Song space SONG00

Song Status SNGS

S01 R01 B001 b01

Step # repetition time #

Shock #

Note that the sequencer status in the upper right corner now SNGS indicating that the song's stop and indicates that a track is selected is. • Press the Enter • Save button. Then the display shows: Press ENTER, goto S01 R01 B001 b01

• As with the sequence Goto function also flashes the first parameter (Here the step number). Again, you can use data entry control and the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons to set the new position, while with the left / right cursor keys to change the parameter can be.

10-3

Page 182 Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

KS-32 user guide

Song Locate parameters are: • STEP - shows the current song position in steps. • REPETITION - Displays the number of repetitions of a step. • BAR - Shows the number of cycles in the relevant Song - Step. • BEAT - Displays the position in shock. • Press the Enter • Save button ends the entering. In the Display the main screen again. This Goto function you can quickly and easily repeatedly in a certain place the sequence jump - the position remains in effect until a is selected other sequence (or a new position is set). If the position is adjusted, sufficient pressing the Enter • Save button (on the Locate screen) to at this point jump. • Did you use the Goto function to a certain point come, you start the sequencer using the Stop button to get out of there to play. (The Stop button also functions as a Continue button. With start the sequence always starts from the beginning.) • If you want to record from that point, press and hold the Record Button, press to stop • Continue .

Sequence / Song Punch In Locate Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Locate (bank 0) / Screen. 1

Seq Punch-In - The use of the Auto Punch function If you have selected a sequence, you will see the display clock, Beat, and clock pulse in which the sequencer is switched on car Punch-in recording starts. This item belongs to the Seq / Song punch-out function together. If the auto punch feature turned on, the KS-32 within Supplied boundaries. Would you like to z. B. only the third beat of a record four-bar sequence: • Select the Auto Punch function and set auto punch = ON. (See " Control Bank "further back in this part.) • Select the punch-in time and make you punch in B003.b01.c01 = (Cycle 3, 1st quarter, clock pulse 1). • Select the punch-out time and make Punch-Out = B003.b04. c96 (cycle 3, 4th quarter, clock pulse 96) • Press Record / Play and just been playing with time. The KS 32 automatically starts the 3rd time with the recording and increases the last clock pulse of the 3rd cycle itself off again. Seq Punch In B001 b01 C01

Clock

Shock

Clock

Than 10 - 4

Page 183 KS-32 user guide

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming • Entering the times are changed using the data entry control or the • Yes Up / Down • No cursor . Use the left / right cursor switch between clock, district and Clock. • Press Enter • Save once to turn the auto punch parameters on the set current values. (Double-click to enter • Save sets car Punch in cycle 1, 1st quarter, clock 1) When a sequence is created, these times will automatically Default values are set (beginning and end of a sequence / a song). If these values are changed, they remain active until new values be set, or a new sequence / a new song is selected.

Editing the times in Song Mode You can use the auto punch mode and the Edit Times screen for Use song tracks. If a song is selected, the screen appears as follows: Song Punch In: S01R01B001b01C01

Step Repeat

Clock Shock

Clock

Note that now you have included two new parameters for the period are: The Song step number and the number of repetition. In Order To at any desired point can be selected exactly in a song.

Adjustment of the positions in real-time If you know the points for punch-in and punch-out exactly can You enter these values manually. If not, you can also quasi "In passing" mark. Here's how: • Select the punch-in screen on. • Press Play . sequence or song is playing. • If the site is where you want to stand types later, press Enter • Save . In order for the punch-in time is accepted. • At the point where the recording is to end, press again Enter • Save . This time is used as the punch-out. • Now you can go on shooting, provided is Auto Punch activated and the KS-32 rises and off automatically.

10-5

Page 184 Part 10 - Sequencer Programming 02

KS-32 user guide

Sequence / Song Punch Out Locate Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Locate (bank 0) / Screen. 2

Seq Punch-Out Do you have a sequence is selected, the display shows clock, district and the clock interval at which the KS-32 gets out of the receptacle, Auto Punch is active. The parameter belongs together with "Seq punch-in" the auto punch feature. Read the punch-in parameters Description above.

Auto Punch / Tempo Locate Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Locate (bank 0) / Screen. 3

Auto Punch This is the same parameter that can be found in the Control Bank - he is again in this bank, so it together with the Can achieve times without having to change banks. (Detailed description in " Control Bank "). • ON - the KS-32 enters at the marked locations on and off. • OFF - normal recording without time requirements. Auto Punch = ON Tempo = 120

Pace Determines the speed of the current sequence. Can the Data Entry Controller can be set; or you set the pace by

rhythmically Enter • Save button press when you click on this screen are. Do you have in the bank control set "MIDI Clock =" appears here "Tempo =" EXT. An external MIDI signal then controls the tempo. Range: 25 to 250 BPM (beats per minute), or EXT.

Tap Tempo In both tempo benches (Locate and click), can use the Enter • Save Press the pace can be specified. The Enter • Save button can always be used as a "tap tempo" button when a speed parameter in Screen will appear.

Tempo - Tempo Song offset Here the pace is determined for a song. The number corresponds to a Percent value of the sequence tempo - Change the tempo offset, The tempo changes each sequence of this song by +/- 99%, within the limits of 25-250 BPM. Here's "Tempo = + 00", all Sequences played in their original tempo.

10-6

Page 185 KS-32 user guide

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming Represents the control bank "Clock = MIDI," here is "Tempo =" EXT. An external MIDI signal then controls the tempo. Range: -99 to +99%, or EXT

The Control Bank In the Control Bank are the parameters for the basic settings the sequencer.

Loop / Countoff Control Bank

Press Edit Seq / preset / Control (Bank 1) / Screen 0th

Loop This parameter determines whether a sequence or a song in circles is played, or is stopped after a single passage. This Setting is stored for each sequence / each song. • ON - The sequence or song is always repeated. • OFF - no repeat -after unique playing stops Sequencer. Loop = ON Countoff = RECORD

Countoff Determines whether the recording and / or playing with a eintakto begin tigenVorzähler. • OFF - No count-in. The sequencer starts running immediately ( Play and Record ). • ON - one bar count is played before the start. • RECORD - count-only before recording. This is the default Setting. • QUIET - "silent" count-in before play and record.

Step Entry / Record Control Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Control (Bank 1) / Screen. 1

Step Entry Use this parameter to turn the KS-32 Step Into command to. With step-Entry You can aufzeichen notes and controller by them use at certain points in the sequence, rather than the original tempo einzuspielen. This method can be useful when heavy, fast Passages are to be imported, or in the middle of program changes must be used.

10-7

Page 186 Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

KS-32 user guide

For single step input: • Adjust Step-entry to ON. • Press Record and Play . The display shows: Step Recording! Autostep = OFF

The Auto Step parameter determines whether after each -Tastendruck the next step is to be selected. • OFF - The sequencer does not go to the next step before Enter • Save is pressed. Thus, multiple notes can be entered on a step be. • ON - The sequencer automatically goes one step further, if a key is pressed. Thus lasssen easy runs and arpeggios enter. For no chords can be so entered. Did you here the desired setting is made, press the Right cursor . The display is now: Gate = STEP B001 b01 c01

Clock

Shock

Clock

} Current Position in the sequence

Here, the length of notes during single-step input is set. • MANUAL - Note length is determined by releasing the button. Press and hold a button and go to this step by step on. Release the button when the desired impact going on, and the note has the appropriate length. • STEP - The length is determined by the Step parameter to the next Screen determined. Each key then has the same length. • FIXED - FIXED is similar to STEP. All notes have the same Length. In contrast to the STEP length is not the StepParameter dependent. You will separately by an extra parameter determined that will appear in the display: Gate = FIXED £

Fixed Gate Time

B001 b01 C01

Current position in the sequence

10-8

Page 187 KS-32 user guide

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming • This extra parameter can be selected and changed. Range: half notes to 1/64 triplets.

Now press the right cursor again, and the Step parameter appears on the display: Step Size Step = £ B000 b01 C00

Current position in the sequence This is the last screen about Step Recording. He should be seen when entering notes. The Step parameter determines the amount by which the sequencer further migrated when you select the next step. This will in time values shown. Range: half notes to 1/64 Triplets If all parameters are set, you can start typing. The Recording will continue until the sequence is finished, or Stop • Continue button is pressed. The display is then "Press ENTER to keep track NEW "(or" Press ENTER to keep first XXX bars "when it was the first recording).

Tip:

Keep in the Step Record Record button is pressed, be played Sounds not included. This is useful when, for example, Drum Tracks receives, and first must find the correct key.

10-9

Page 188 Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

KS-32 user guide

Record - The record mode The second parameter to this screen, selects one of three Record Modes of. • REPLACE - Everything is recorded on an existing track, deletes the previous data. The sequencer beeendet recording, if the sequence once has expired and changes in the Audition / Play mode. This is the default setting. • ADD - New data is added to the old (or mixed). Existing data is retained. Again, the sequencer stops at the End and go into the audition / Play mode. • LOOPED - As with ADD the new data be mixed. However, the sequencer is now on admission and repeated the Until you press Stop sequence over and over again. This could be called "Drum Machine Mode "call - new notes are always assoadded. There is also a fourth record mode, which is only reachable when a Song is selected: • MIXDOWN - Here are dynamic volume and pan Changes for sequence and song tracks recorded. The KS-32 accepts only on Ändernungen of the volume and panning screens.

Notes, controllers, program changes, etc. in this fashion not was added. Depending on the setting of the "Song Edit Tracks Displayed" parameter (see Screen number 14 below), you can either sequence or song Tracks mix.

Auto Punch / Clock Control Bank

Press Edit Seq / preset / Control (Bank 1) / Screen. 2

Auto Punch This parameter enables a very powerful feature of KS-32 the auto punch feature. Auto punch means that at a overdub Receiving the KS-32 automatically defined at points you in the Shot on and drop out again. You can, for running sequencer to play and the KS-32 enters the intake and like a invisible sound engineer. The points of entry and exit, we call Edit times, they are on the screens 02 and 03 in the Locate Bank set. • ON - The KS-32 used in the Locate Bank established Edit Times for punch-in and punch-out. • OFF - Normal recording without considering the Edit times. The is the default setting.

10-10

Page 189 KS-32 user guide

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

Clock - The sequencer synchronization source This parameter determines the synchronization source for the sequencer: • INTERNAL - The internal clock controls the speed of Sequencer. The KS-32 has a resolution of 96 ppq (pulses per Quarter note) for extremely accurate recording. This is the default setting. • MIDI - Selects the external MIDI clock as sync source for the sequencer. Use this setting when another one Device (eg. As a computer sequencer or a rhythm machine) as Want to use master clock. As soon as "MIDI Clock =" angewält is displayed at the appropriate place "Tempo = EXT" as an indicator that the KS-32 is synchronized externally.

Song uses effect from: Control Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Control (Bank 1) / Screen. 3

Song uses Effect from: Here you can set which utilizes effect when playing a song to be - that of the individual sequences or a parent Song Effect. A song always consists of a chain of sequences of Will be played back. Each sequence has its own effect. When Change from one sequence to the next, it can be too short Interruptions occur when a new effect must be loaded. This can be avoided by the song a separate, parent effect is. • Sequences - The particular sequence effects are used. • Song - The song sets the sequence effect effects expire. This is the factory setting.

Song Edit Tracks Displayed Control Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Control (Bank 1) / Screen. 4

Song Edit Tracks Displayed Here you determine if the song or Sequence in MIXDOWN Fashion Tracks to be mixed. • SEQ - the display shows the sequence of tracks appear just overall selected songs. The LEDs above the track buttons will flash for you know that you can now see Sequence tracks on the display and not the song

Tracks. • SONG - in the display you see song tracks. This is the default Setting.

Tip :

If you are working on a song, and is not persistent in the Control Bank want to go to switch the tracks, you can use the following trick apply: • If you are in Sequence mode, you can use a quick double switch to song tracks on a track button. So, as you would in the Control Bank this parameter changed. The LED on the track buttons flashes when you see Sequence tracks. You uniformly illuminated when You have selected song tracks. Song tracks as tracks # 9 - 16 shown.

10 - 11

Page 190 Part 10 - Sequencer Programming 15

KS-32 user guide

Save Changes fashion Control Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Control (Bank 1) / Screen. 5

SaveChanges Fashion With this parameter, you can choose between three different modes Select how the KS-32 changes to the track parameters accepts or not. • EDITS AUTO SAVED - All changes in track parameters or the sound track selection is saved immediately. You do not need with Enter • Save to save. The "Save Changes" query appears not. • U-SAVE MANUALLY - you can use any track parameter or Edit track sounds, but the changes are automatically discarded if another sequence or song is called. The "Save Changes" Abrfrage not appear. You must manually Enter • Save button press to accept change. This is a practical setting when not busy with shooting and are the "Save Changes" query looks rather disturbing. When you However, a new recording, the KS-32 automatically enters the SHOW PROMPT setting. • SHOW PROMPT - If you have a track parameter or the sound have changed a track and then a new sequence or Select another song, you will be using the "Save Changes" query asked whether you want to accept or discard the changes, as described below. This is the default.

About the "Save Changes?" - Screen Together with notes, controllers and program changes, available on each Are recorded track, other data are still in a sequence or a song stored. These are: • the name of the sequence or song • the pace of the sequence or song • the sound of each track • all performance / track parameters for each track • which tracks are selected and / or layered together • setting the LOOP parameter in the Control Bank • Has CLICK parameter in the Click -Bank • punch-in and punch-out points

10-12

Page 191 KS-32 user guide

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming Every time you record a track of a sequence or a song, All these parameters are saved automatically - that is, the KS-32 remembers them when they leave the sequence (by a Select another) and attacks later back to it. If you now change those parameters and select a different sequence appears following message: Save Changes? SEQUENCE NAME

• Press the Up • Yes cursor key, the sequence or song saved with the new parameters. • Press the Down • No cursor key parameters remain as they were after the last shot. In both cases, the track data (notes, controller and proProgram Change) always saved. Sometimes it is difficult to Remember, what you now exactly changes when this screen appears. Than Good rule to remember: Do you agree with the sequence or song satisfied, press YES quiet. Did you just herumexperimented with different tempos, sounds, MIDI settings, etc., and want to leave everything as it was, press NO.

Tip :

Are you in the select sequences / presets mode, there is a simple trick save all changes in a sequence or a song. With Double-click on the Enter • Save button. As mentioned above, you can work around this issue by the SaveChanges parameter to U-SAVE MANUALLY turn. For live Application and other applications where with tempo, track parameters, inter alia, experimenting, that's the right attitude.

Total Sequencer Free Memory Control Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Control (Bank 1) / Screen. 6

Total Sequencer Free Memory (display only) This parameter shows the remaining space in the sequencer in Percent. Here you can enter or change anything. Range: 00% to 100%

10 - 13

Page 192 Part 10 - Sequencer Programming 17

Reinit Sequencer Control Bank

KS-32 user guide

Press Edit Seq / preset / Control (Bank 1) / Screen. 7

Reinitialize Sequencer Allows you to delete the entire sequencer memory contents. If You want this, select this parameter and: • Press Enter • Save . The KS-32 is surprised and asks "Erase Sequencer Memory? ". • Press Up • Yes cursor or Enter • Save . The KS-32 clears all Presets, sequences and songs from memory. Afterwards only a

Empty sequence and a blank song in the squares 00 and 70. (It is always a song and a sequence in memory.)

The Click Bank The Click -Bank contains the parameters associated with the metronome signal and have to do the tempo of a sequence or a song.

Click / Interval ClickBank Press Edit Seq / preset / click (Bank 2) / Screen 0th

20 Click

Determines whether the metronome is heard or not. • OFF - the click signal is not when playing even when To hear recording. • ON - the click signal is always heard when the sequencer is running. • RECORD -the click signal will be heard when recording. that is the default setting. Click = RECORD Interval = ™

Interval Determines the note value of the click signal. Range: 1/2 to 1 / 32T notes (1/4 notes is the default setting)

Click Volume / Pan Click ClickBank Press Edit Seq / preset / click (Bank 2) / Screen. 1

Click-Volume Adjusts the volume of the metronome. Range: 00 to 99 (99 is default)

10-14

Page 193 KS-32 user guide

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

Click-Pan Determines the position of the click in the stereo image. • LEFT - The click signal is left in the stereo image • CENTER - The click signal is in the middle. This is the Default. • RIGHT - The click signal is quite right in the stereo image.

Pace ClickBank

Press Edit Seq / preset / click (Bank 2) / Screen. 2

Pace Specifies the tempo of the sequence. If the sequencer is running and this Screen is displayed, you can use the Enter • Save button, the Speed typing ("TapTempo"). If "MIDI Clock = 'is here "Tempo =" EXT. Range: 25 to 250 BPM (beats per minute) or EXT

Important :

After you have selected the pace, make sure that you this parameter then leave again. Since this parameter a very wide range of values is (226 individual items, distributed over a Control range of about 6 cm, see chart below), the controller responds very sensitive. A small glitch or a slight vibration (Such as a hard-hinged key) to the data controller to a other value "jump" and thereby leave the value for the speed change.

Tempo Control Range: WINDOW

VALUE IN DISPLAY

254-255 253-254 252-253 251-252

250 249 248 247

005-006 004-005 003-004 002-003 001-002 000-001

30 29 28 27 26 25

As shown in the diagram above, there are 226 different Parameter values. As the pace of parameters such a large range of values has, which is data entry knob so sensitive that even a slight Contact is sufficient in the window (or range) of another To slip out.

10-15

Page 194 Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

KS-32 user guide

The Song Bank - Song Edit Functions If you are in the Seq / preset edit mode, the song Cmds button ( Bank 3 ) press, you can reach the song Cmds bank. Were you previously a Sequence is selected, the message "SORRY appears in the display! Select a first song, "which states that you must have selected a song to in come to this bank.

Create Song Song Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / song Commands (Bank 3) / Screen 0th

Create Song Use this command to create a new song that then Song step editor can be assembled. If you select this parameter, the following display appears: SONG ##

SNGS

Create SONG / Pset

• Press Enter • Save . The display will then: New Song Location = ##

With the data entry control and Up • Yes / No • Down cursor , you can now scroll through the free song memories. • Do you have a location is found, press the right cursor . In the Display shows: New Name = Song - ##

Now you can get back to data entry knob and cursor keys to select a Enter the name. With the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor select the Characters, with the left / right cursor into place. • Have you found a place and enter a name, press You will enter • Save . The display will briefly "Command Successful!"

Note : As I said, you can use the song Cmds only reach -Bank if a song is selected. The quickest way to a new song To create is to call an empty memory location and enter • Save Push button, as described under "How to make a new sequence / song creates" Part 9 described.

10-16

Page 195 KS-32 user guide 31

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

Copy Song Song Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / song Commands (Bank 3) / Screen. 1

Copy song With this command, you can access a copy of the currently playing song another location make. The original song remains unchanged. First, make sure that the song You want to copy is also selected. Then select the Copy Song Parameters. The display shows "Copy Song". • Press Enter • Save . The display is now: From Song

CURRENT SONG

• Press the right cursor . Then you will see: To Song Location = ##

The data entry knob , you can now have a free space search. Have you found a place, press the right cursor again. New name = MY FIRST HIT

Now you can enter a 16-digit name. Data Entry knob and • Yes Up / Down • No-cursor to determine the character, left / right cursor the location. • If you have entered a name, press Enter • Save to the Complete entry. The display briefly shows "command appears Successful! "To confirm.

Erase Song / Pset Song Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / song Commands (Bank 3) / Screen. 2

Erase Song / Preset The Erase Song command deletes any song / preset storage and leaves an undefined memory location. First, select the Erase Song command. Then press the Enter • Save button.

10-17

Page 196 Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

KS-32 user guide

The display shows: Song space Erase SONG ## <SONG NAME>

With data entry controller and up • Yes / No • Down cursor , you can occupied Seicherplätze scroll. In the upper right corner of the display is the memory number below the name of the song. • If the song you want to delete in the display, press the Enter • Save button. The display briefly shows "Command Successful!" Appears as Confirmation.

Song Information Song Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / song Commands (Bank 3) / Screen. 3

Song Information Appear after selecting the "Song Information" command key Information about the current song on the display such. As the number of Song steps, the size in events and the total playing time. To this Display information: • Select the song and then the song information command. • Press Enter • Save . The display is now the song name and Space. • Press the right cursor . The display two parameters appear: "Song Steps" - The Number Song steps. "Song-size" - The size of the current song in Events. • Press the right cursor again. The displays shows the Total playing time of the songs in minutes, seconds and hundredths Seconds.

Rename Song / Pset Song Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / song Commands (Bank 3) / Screen. 4

Rename Song / Preset With this command you can change the name of a song. The display is: SONG ##

SNGS

Rename SONG / Pset

10 - 18

Page 197 KS-32 user guide

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming • Press Enter • Save . Now the display looks like this: New name = <Old song name>

• Use the data entry knob and cursor keys to scroll the new Enter the name. Then press Enter • Save and the display appears as confirmation shortly "Command Successful!".

Copy Preset Data Song Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / song Commands (Bank 3) / Screen. 5

Copy Preset Data As you know from the previous chapters, are presets Components of each sequence, the important information about the

"Performance" aspects of a track included. Sounds -Tastenumfang, MIDI and Other Information contained in a preset. (See Part 8 - Presets for more information on presets). This command can now be preset data in a song on a delegated to others. This refers to the preset data of the song tracks , regardless of the preset information of the tracks in each Sequences that make up the song. Note that Song Preset Only in a different data defined can be copied song / preset. To Copy an undefined song you use the Copy Preset Function under the Make Default Preset button. Select a song and call this command appears in Display: SONG ##

SNGS

Copy Preset Data

• Press Enter • Save . The display is then "From Preset Song ##" that it comes as a confirmation for the preset data of this song. • Press the right cursor . The display will then: To Preset = Song - ##

You can now use data entry controller and up • Yes / No • Down cursor Calling an existing preset location. Because there is no note Data are concerned, any space can here in the sequencer be taken, even if he is not in one of the song benches.

10 - 19

Page 198 Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

KS-32 user guide

• If a new location is found, press Enter • Save to the command complete. The display briefly shows "Command Successful!" Appears as Confirmation.

Edit Song Steps Song Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / song Commands (Bank 3) / Screen. 6

Edit the Song Steps - The Song Step Editor Select the Edit Song Steps command to the Song Step Editor reach. Here sequences are successively set to the basic To form the skeleton of a song. A song consists of several steps (steps). Each step has: • a sequence which is played at this point, • a number of repetitions, or reps of this sequence, and • Mute and Transpose information for each track of the sequence in this step. When you select Edit Song Steps The following display appears: Song space Song ## SNGS Edit Song Steps

• Press Enter • Save . You will now see the main screen of the Song Step Editor. Here you can access the step, which sequence it is assigned, and how often they should be repeated. The display looks like this: Number of repetitions

Current Step #

Number of repetitions Rep ##

Current Step # Step ##

Intro Sequence

Sequence name The default parameters on this screen is the step number. If this screen is first selected, this parameter flashes, and can immediately be changed. This gives you faster access on the two main parameters of this screen, step number and Repeat. Use the left / right cursor to jump back and forth between the two and forth. To select the repeat parameter, press the Cursor left to get on the Step parameter also.

10 - 20

Page 199 KS-32 user guide

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming • Step - If this parameter is selected, the step number can be changed be. With the data entry control and Up • Yes / No • Down cursor You can scroll through each song steps. Range: 01 to 99 • Sequence Name - This is the sequence for the corresponding song Step selected. An empty Step "UNDEFINED STEP" appears. To add a new step at the end of the song, select "* END OF SONG *" and push once the Up • Yes cursor button to define the step. Characterized a sequence is used, and the end of the song for a position shifted to the rear. • Rep - This is the number of iterations for the sequence of Steps entered. Range: 01 to 99 or FS FS stands for Foot Switch. If = FS is set in REP, the current song step repeated until the Aux. Foot switch (only if the optional foot switch SW-5 / SW1-10 connected) pressed will. When the foot switch is pressed, the current step is still played to the end and it follows the next song step. If you have set these parameters, you go with the right cursor one place behind the Sequence Name parameter. The display The following display appears: Transpose = +12 Status = PPPMMTTT

On this screen, you can now determine which played tracks or be muted (mute) and which are to be transposed. The Whole applies again only for the currently active song step. In addition, If a value for the transpose be set. • Transpose - Specifies the value for the transpose that for each Track is considered to be transposed played in this step (see below). This makes the mood for the whole track is increased or decreased. Range: -12 to +12, with each step corresponding to one semitone. • MUTE AND TRANSPOSE - The Law Cursor can go through the individual tracks, and individual determine whether a track is turned on or off and transposed to. An M means the track is muted. A P is, the track is played normally, and T means the track is transposed and played.

10-21

Page 200 Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

KS-32 user guide

• When all tracks are set correctly, you can take the legal Cursor to the following screen: INSERT / REMOVE INSERT

Step ## Step ##

Middle 8 Groove

Sequence name The last screen parameters in the Song step editor gives you the Possibility to add or remove steps (insert and remove). • INSERT - before the current song step a blank step is inserted. • REMOVE - the current song step is deleted and the resulting Closed gap again.

Editing Song steps - The Song Step Editor To edit the song steps of the current song: • Select Edit Song Steps by pressing the song Cmds button ( Bank 3 ), and Screen 6 if you are fashion in the Sequence Edit. • Move the right cursor in the Name field. In a new Song is available as Step 1 is always "* END OF SONG *". • Use the Up • Yes / No • Down-cursor of the step is defined and a Sequence selected. • Double-tap the left cursor to the parameter for the To achieve repetition. Enter the number of times a (REPS = ##). If the sequence only once run, must have a 01 stop here. • Repeatedly press the right cursor to the Transpose / Status Parameters appear. Want to individual tracks in this Step mute or transpose, make the letters accordingly. To mute a M . To transpose tracks, make T a. You must also then set a value for the transposition of these tracks. • Repeatedly press the left cursor until the Step parameter again appear in the display (it comes to where they were just as often the Must press button). • If all entries are correct, go back to "Step = ##" and go with the Up • Yes-cursor to the next step of the song. (The display is again "* END OF SONG *"). Make everything here as previously described. For each successive song step select immmer first displays a sequence, enter the number of Repetitions, and then go on to the next. • There is always a last step, "* END OF SONG *" behind the defined last song step.

10-22

Page 201 KS-32 user guide

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming In order to arrive at a different step in the song: • Select "Step =", and use the Up • Yes / No- • Down cursor to arrive at any step in the song. Have all Completed entries, you can scroll back through all the steps to to check that everything is correct. In order to change something in a song step: • If you want to change one of the variables in a step (z. B.

Sequence name, repetitions, mute or Transpose), select simply step on, go to the parameter and change it. By one step insert (insert): • Go to "Step = ##" and select the Step to, before the new Should lie Step. If z. B. between Step 2 and Step 3, a new is to be used, go to the third • Use the cursor left to go to INSERT / DELETE parameter. Select "INSERT" and press Enter • Save . An empty step is inserted (the display will then EMPTY * LOCATION *). • To enter in the Name field and use the Up • Yes / Down • NoCursor in a new sequence for the new step. • Make all the Step parameter for this new step (see above). To the song to a step somewhere delete (delete): • Go to "Step = ##" and select the Step that will be deleted to. • Use the left cursor go to INSERT / DELETE parameter. Select "DELETE" and then press Enter • Save . The corresponding song step is deleted and slide all the following steps a place before. When you are completely finished, press the Select Seq / preset to the area to leave. You can then play button when you are their new Want to listen to the song.

10-23

Page 202 Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

KS-32 user guide

The Seq Commands Bank If you are in the Sequence / Preset Edit mode Seq Cmds press button ( Bank 4 ) They come in the Seq Cmds -Bank. Press this button to turn off a song out, "SORRY appear! Select a sequence first "to you to remember that you only need to select a sequence to in this To get bank.

Create SEQ / Pset Seq Commands Bank

Press Edit Seq / preset / Seq Commands (Bank 4) / Screen 0th

Create Sequence / Preset This command creates a new sequence is created. If you have selected these parameters, the following message appears: SEQ 49 Create SEQ / Pset

• Press Enter • Save . The display will then: New Sequence Location = ##

STOP

With data entry controller and up • Yes / No • Down cursor , you can now by the free sequence still available - Scroll memory. • Have you found a place for your sequence, press the laws, regulations Cursor . The following display appears: Time Signature 4.4

Beats per measure

Note value

With the two parameters on this screen, the time signature for the new one Sequence set. First, set the beats per measure and go Then use the right cursor for the second value, the note value the blows. Also here are data entry controller and up • Yes / Down • NoCursor data entry.

10-24

Page 203 KS-32 user guide

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming • If you entered the beat, press the right cursor . The display shows: New name = Sequence - ##

You can now, as elsewhere in the sequencer also a Enter the name for the sequence. • You now have a free space occupied by a sequence of a time signature and given a name, and can now use a pressure to enter • Save button to complete the whole. The display will read again short "Command Successful!"

Copy Sequence Seq Commands Bank

Press Edit Seq / preset / Seq Commands (Bank 4) / Screen. 1

Copy Sequence With this function, you can use a sequence to another Copy space. Note that while the original sequence remains unchanged. First, make sure that the to copied sequence is also selected. Then select the Copy Parameters. The display shows "Copy Sequence." • Press Enter • Save , then the display shows: FROM Sequence LATEST SEQUENCE

• By pressing the right cursor button appears following Display: To Sequence Location = ##

With the data entry control and Up • Yes / No • Down cursor can

With the data entry control and Up • Yes / No • Down cursor can Now scroll through the still free sequencer memory. Do You Have the target location is found, press again the right cursor : New name = Sequence ##

10-25

Page 204 Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

KS-32 user guide

You can enter a 16-digit name for the new sequence now. With the data entry control and Up • Yes / No • Down cursor determine the character to the left / right cursor into place. • When you have found a name, press Enter • Save Button. The display shows "Command Successful!". The copy is with a new name at the desired location in memory.

Erase Seq / Pset Seq Commands Bank

Press Edit Seq / preset / Seq Commands (Bank 4) / Screen. 2

Erase Sequence / Preset The Erase Sequence / Preset command deletes an arbitrary sequence / preset Space and leaves an undefined memory location. Choose first the Erase Sequence / Preset command. Then press the Enter • Save button. The display shows: Space Erase SEQ ## <SEQUENCE NAME>

With data entry controller and up • Yes / No • Down cursor , you can the occupied places scroll. In the upper right corner of the Display is the memory number below the name of the sequence. • If the sequence that you want to delete in the display, press the Enter • Save button. The display briefly shows "Command Successful!" Appears as Confirmation.

Sequence Info Seq Commands Bank

Press Edit Seq / preset / Seq Commands (Bank 4) / Screen. 3

Sequence Information With the "Sequence Information" command is available on request valuable Information about the current sequence. These include the length in Clocks, the space requirement in events and the total length of current sequence: • Select the sequence in question, and then this Parameters. • Press Enter • Save . Now the name and the display will show Memory number. • Press the right cursor . The display will now appear two Parameters: "Length" - this is the length of the sequence in bars. "Size" and how much space (in events), the sequence can claim takes.

10-26

Page 205 KS-32 user guide

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

• Press the right cursor button again. The display will now the meter of the current sequence. • Press the right cursor again. The display now shows the total total time of the sequence in minutes, seconds and hundredths of seconds.

Rename Seq / Pset Seq Commands Bank

Press Edit Seq / preset / Seq Commands (Bank 4) / Screen. 4

Rename Sequence / Preset With this command you can change the name of a sequence later change. If you select this command, the display looks like this: SEQ ##

STOP

Rename SEQ / Pset

• Press Enter • Save , the display looks like this: New name = <Age Seq name>

• With Data Entry knob and up • Yes / No • Down cursor , you can now enter a new name. When you are finished, press Enter • Save . The display briefly shows "Command Successful!" Appears.

Copy Preset Data Seq Commands Bank

Press Edit Seq / preset / Seq Commands (Bank 4) / Screen. 5

Copy Preset Data As has been said, SIDN Presets part of each sequence, include but important information about the "performance" parameter of the Sequence. Sound, -Tastenumfang, MIDI information and more stuff is contained in a preset. (Presets in Part 8 - Presets exactly discussed shortly.) This parameter is used to preset information of a Transfer sequence to a different location. Note that this command returns the saved preset data only to a defined Preset / Sequence / song memory transfers. To preset data to a undefined copy space, use the Copy Preset Function under the Make Default Preset button. Select a sequence and you invoke this command.

10-27

Page 206 Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

KS-32 user guide

The following display appears: SEQ ##

STOP

Copy Preset Data

• Press Enter • Save . Now appears "From Preset Seq in the display ## "With the current sequence. Press the right cursor , then you will see: To Preset = Seq - ##

You can now use the data entry control and Up • Yes / Down • NoCursor each defined filter preset memory. Because not here Note information is affected, you can use any space, even take a song, not only sequences. • Have you found a new place, you only need to enter • Save press to complete the whole. Appears in the display like seen "Command Successful!".

Append Sequence Seq Commands Bank

Press Edit Seq / preset / Seq Commands (Bank 4) / Screen. 6

Append Sequence "Append" to attach a sequence to another, one new sequence data with the sum of the two individual sequences is produced. Of course you can also hang a sequence of themselves in order to double. The currently active sequence gets to another sequence IS attached, which in turn remains unaltered. (Read That last sentence again prefer.) • Make sure that the sequence that you want to extend, and is selected. • Select the Append function. The display shows "Append is Sequence. " • Press Enter • Save . The display shows: FROM Sequence = <Sequence name>

• Now use the Find Data Entry knob or the Up • Yes / Down • NoCursor the sequence of which is to be attached to the active sequence

10-28

Page 207 KS-32 user guide

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming • Press the right cursor . appears in the display: TO Sequence = <Sequence name>

This is a display-only. Here, the sequence should be at the new Sequence is to be attached. • Press Enter • Save . For a moment Command appears " Successful! "Is displayed, as confirmation that all went well.

Change Length Seq Command Bank

Press Edit Seq / preset / Seq Command (Bank 4) / Screen. 7

Change Length - inserting and deleting bars in a sequence Although the first recording of a sequence length of their first times sets, you can later delete this functional clocks or add. From the Sequence Edit Bank select the Change Length parameter. The display shows "Change Length". Press Enter • Save , then see You: INSERT ### bars at 1 bar

On this screen you will find three parameters. Top left is whether clocks inserted (INSERT) or deleted (REMOVE) should be. Do You Have entered this, you can use the right cursor to the next

Parameters are included. There the number of clocks is entered, the deleted or to be added. The third parameter indicates at which Site in the sequence you want to happen.

INSERT clocks The INSERT function, you can select any number up to a Insert total length of 999 bars. It consists of two steps: 1) Determine to be inserted at which point bars, and 2) How many bars are to be acquired. • With Data Entry knob and up • Yes / No • Down-cursor to determine where the new measures are intended to be. This can be any position in the sequence be: • If you select 01 clock, the clocks at the beginning of seconds are frequency set.

10-29

Page 208 Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

KS-32 user guide

• If you have a clock behind to take the last beat of the sequence are the new measures at the end of the sequence. • If you are taking any other position, start the new measures exactly at this point. • Use the left / right cursor select the appropriate parameters to. • Use the data entry control and Up • Yes / No • Down cursor determine how many bars are to be added. Here you can You enter each number up to a total length of the sequence of 999. This idle cycles are inserted starting at the location you previously have entered.

CLEAR clocks With the REMOVE function any bars of a sequence can be deleted , starting with any bar in the sequence. This is useful if you are one in the first frame Sequence have pressed the Stop button too late, and the length then For example, 5 instead of 4 bars is. Use this function to cut practically from the end. To bars of a sequence to be deleted: • Determine the Data Entry knob or the Up • Yes / Down • NoCursor is to be deleted from where. • Then jump on the parameter that you want to delete the number of Clock determined. • Enter here how many bars are to be deleted. • Press the Enter • Save button. The display briefly shows "Command Successful!" As confirmation.

10-30

Page 209 KS-32 user guide

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

The track Commands Bank The functions that can be found in the track Commands Bank concern, always the parameters of the selected tracks. When a sequence has been selected, the selected track will always be edited; is a Song active, this applies to the corresponding song track.

Determination of the editing area - use the track-range function For most commands in the Event Edit Bank can be a certain loading Set rich, are to be changed in the data. This can be very useful his Lich, if such. as only bass and snare drum in a drum track should be quantized, while the other sounds unquantized . stay This function is always used as follows. • After the first access sees the track-range display like this: Press ENTER to DO ENTIRE TRACK

• "DO ENTIRE TRACK" flashes. It is not edited the whole track. • Press the Up • Yes cursor , "SET TRACK on the display RANGE. " • Press Enter • Save . Then you will see: SEQ Range Start B001 b01 C01

• Now, determined using the cursor keys measure, beat, and clock will be with the editing to begin.

Note:

This display is valid only for the starting point in the sequence tracks. Song Tracks have their own screen with additional parameters. • If you have entered the starting point, press the right cursor . • Now it asks for the endpoint for editing. Enter here the desired position, exactly as above. Here too, the Song Tracks something other parameters.

10-31

Page 210 Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

KS-32 user guide

• If you have also entered the press again the right cursor . Now this screen appears: Track Key Range A0

Low Key

High Key

• This display is identical for sequence and song track. Here, the Keys extent be determined within the pass editing to. This goes beyond cursor and data entry control, but also with the Keyboard. (See Part 8 - Presets ) • If you have entered the keyboard range, press Enter • Save . In the Display is then "Press ENTER to DO RANGE ONLY." • Press Enter • Save to confirm the entry.

Important :

The Range Start and Range End times comply with the locators in the Locate Bank agree that you use for auto punch. If start be changed and end somewhere that always applies to both areas.

Event Edit track Track Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / track commands (Bank 5) / Screen 0th

Event Edit track The Event Edit Track function is a powerful tool in the Reworking of tracks. Every single note, each controller event can be localized individually and change. The Event Edit Track function is on the same level as the other track edit functions. Nevertheless, you need here before determine which track you want to edit. If you once Event Editor, you can not change the track. • Use the track buttons to the desired track. • Select the Event Edit Track function and press Enter • Save . The display shows: Track = 1 Event = ALL EVENTS

The top line shows the track number (display only) in the bottom line of the event type filter.

10 - 32

Page 211 KS-32 user guide

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

Event - Event type filter Here you can specify which events are to be displayed when you scroll through the track. If this is ALL EVENTS, all recorded events appear. Otherwise, you will see only the type of was chosen from the list below. This facilitates searching certain events, as all others are ignored in searches. The following event types are available: MOD WHEEL - Modulation CHN PRESSR - Channel Aftertouch PEDAL - foot pedal MIX VOLUME - Mixdown volume VOLUME - Volume Pedal MIX PAN - Mixdown panoramic SUSTAIN - Sustain Pedal PITCH BEND - Pitch Bend wheel SOSTENUTO - Sostenuto pedal PGM CHANGE - Program Change Timbral - Timbre controller KEY PRESSR - Polyphonic aftertouch RELEASE - Release Controller KEY EVENTS - Only notes Events EXT CONTRL - External Controller ALL EVENTS - All note and controller ALL CONTRL - All controllers • Press the right cursor . The display shows: Current Event Type Event cursor MOD WHL *** 123

Event value

B001 b04 C96

Event location This is the selection screen, the search - Display for almost all types of events. For ALL EVENTS, KEY PRESSURE and KEY EVENT sees this Screen a bit different and will be discussed later.

Current Event Type This is the current event type, which can be seen in Dipslay. This is a view only parameter.

Event cursor If you have selected this field, you can use data entry controller and • Yes Up / Down • No cursor in the track jump back and forth, and after Search the events that are to be changed. Mitdem Up • Yes / Down • NoCursor you always jump to the next event in the series, with the Data Entry knob to scroll quickly forward or backward. You will hear the notes of the tracks.

10-33

Page 212 Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

KS-32 user guide

Event Value Here you can see the value of the current event. The value can with the Data Entry knob and up • Yes / No • Down-cursor to be changed. These changes will take effect immediately.

Event Location Displays the current postition in bars, district and clocks. These three points can be selected directly using the left / right cursor. Use the Up / Down cursor can then change the value and back in the track and manufactured be skipped. Legatees you that no influence of these parameters on track data has. It is intended solely for the overview and localization of Events in the track.

Note:

When a song track is edited, this display has two more Parameters indicative of the song step and the number of repetitions.

Selection Screen for All Events, Key Events and Key Pressure If you are an Edit Events All Events, key events and key pressure have been selected, an additional parameter will be displayed: Current Event Type Touch Name Event value KEY EVNT G4 # 123 B001 b04 C96

Event location

Key Name This additional parameter displays the name of the note, the edited, or the aftertouch value (at key pressure) can be changed. Applies to the note name the same as for the event cursor. Again you can with Data Entry knob or Up • Yes / No • Down-cursor of a Note to the next jump. To change a note, just play the desired new note

the keyboard.

Note:

If the currently selected event is a KEY EVENT, the value next to the velocity (velocity). If this value change, you will notice that there are only every third or fourth value is displayed. This corresponds to the internal resolution of KS 32 and is therefore completely normal.

10-34

Page 213 KS-32 user guide

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming If the currently selected event a KEY EVENT, can be reached by Press the right cursor the note length (duration). It looks at the Display like this: Event Duration Beats 004 Clk 96

These two parameters determine the length of a particular note in Beats and clocks. This screen is only displayed if the current event Type KEY EVNT is. For all other types of events follows the Location screen immediately Audition Screen (Before - After Control).

Note:

If you have selected ALL EVENTS alternately appear one or other screen, depending on which type is shown.

AUDITION, INSERT, and REMOVE If you have found a specific point in the track, you can the next screen notes, controller or Program Change onset (INSERT) or delete (REMOVE). You can also find old and Compare new version (Audition). • From the selection screen, press the right cursor until the display shows is: Press ENTER to AUDITION / EXIT

Here you can do three things: 1) INSERT : inserting notes, controller or Program Change 2) REMOVE : Delete notes, controller or Program Change 3) AUDITION : All changes (INSERT, REMOVE or other Editiements) compare with the original version. • AUDITION / EXIT - If you have changed any events (Either with the event location screen or the INSERT / REMOVE Commands), come by pressing the Enter • Save button directly to the KEEP OLD / NEW screen. Have you looked at the events only, but nothing changes, exit by pressing the Enter • Save button, the Track Cmds - Bank • INSERT EVENT - With this command you can now events in the Track inserting. What kind of event you determine through the event Filter on the first screen of the Event Edit bank. Then go to Selection screen and locate the point at which used an event should be. Set the desired value. With Enter • Save is the event used.

10 - 35

Page 214

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

KS-32 user guide

• REMOVE EVENT - Removes the event that on the Selection Screen just to see. As with INSERT first locate the event type and then choose on the selection screen the exact event. Than Finally, you use this screen to delete the event. Enter • Save executes the command.

Tip :

If a note is deleted, remain Touch name and velocity stored. When you next again inserting a note (INSERT) these values are taken as default value. So you can easily Moving and comfortable single notes that are out of sync. This is but only for note events.

Copy Track Track Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / track commands (Bank 5) / Screen. 1

Copy Track With this command a track or a part thereof from the active Sequence copied to another track. This track is also in the same Sequence lie. • Select "Copy Track" and press Enter • Save . The display is: Track = 1 <SEQUENCE NAME>

• If you want the output track in a different sequence or Copy to another song, type in the lower line the target sequence or the desired song a. If the copy in the same sequence, just let stand the default setting. • On the track parameter page, you can select the track now, in the in the data is to be copied.

10-36

Page 215 KS-32 user guide

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming • Press the right cursor . The display shows: Insert copied data at bar: 1

• With Data Entry knob and up • Yes / No • Down cursor , you can now set the clock in which the data is to be inserted. • Press again the right cursor . You may wish to re-enter a range for the data to be copied. (If the entire track can be copied, skip this screen easily.) • If everything is correct, press Enter • Save .

Erase Track Track Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / track commands (Bank 5) / Screen. 2

Erase Track With this command, notes, controllers, or other data be deleted; either from the entire track or a particular area. • Select the Erase Track command and press Enter • Save : Track = 1 <SEQUENCE NAME>

The top line shows the track number to be edited. You can change the cursor keys this parameter. In the bottom Line is the name of the sequence or the song that is being edited. This Parameter is purely a display that can not be changed here. • Press the right cursor again and set the desired Edit range (as described previously). If the entire track editing will skip this screen easily. • Once everything is set, press Enter • Save .

Note:

If you deleted the whole track, there is no subsequent Possibility of comparison .

Merge Track Track Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / track commands (Bank 5 / Screen. 3

Merge Track With this command, the data of the current track will be a another track mixed. The target track can in the same sequence or are in another. The data remains the source tracks unaltered.

10-37

Page 216 Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

KS-32 user guide

• Select the Merge track parameters and press Enter • Save : Track = 1 <SEQUENCE NAME>

• If you want the data of the output - the tracks in a different sequence or Copy to another song, you can on the bottom line with DataEntry knob and up • Yes / No • Down cursor to the corresponding Select memory. The default is the current sequence, in contained the track. • Go to the track parameters and to select the track with the the data should be mixed. Press Enter • Save .

Transpose Track Track Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / track commands (Bank 5) / Screen. 4

Transpose Track

The Transpose function increases or decreases the pitch of a particular track in semitones. Moreover, with the Transpose the availability of drum and percussion tracks be changed and adapted to other instruments by only individual notes transposed. • Select the Transpose function. Press Enter • Save : Track = 1 <SEQUENCE NAME>

10-38

Page 217 KS-32 user guide

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming • Press the right cursor . The display shows: Semi Tones to Transpose: +00

• Enter the value to which the track is to be transposed: Range: -12 to +12 semitones. (If you have more than one octave or want to transpose down, use this function simply several times.) • Press again the right cursor and set the desired Edit range (as described previously). If the entire track editing will skip this screen easily. • If you have entered the desired range (or the whole Want to transpose track), press Enter • Save .

Shift Track Track Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / track commands (Bank 5) / Screen. 5

Shift Track With this function, all events in a track to a specific value forward or moved backward. Also here the smallest unit of the clock pulse. (A quarter note is 96 clocks). Thus, the subjective perception of timing of a track can be improved be. Especially with drum tracks the shifting makes a Clocks few very positive impact. In addition, with the shift Create Function interesting echo effects when you copy a track and then delayed by a rhythmic value. • Select the shift function and press Enter • Save : Track = 1 <SEQUENCE NAME>

10-39

Page 218 Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

KS-32 user guide

• With Data Entry knob and up • Yes / No • Down cursor , you can now Enter the value for the shift. Positive values move the Events in stroke further back, more negative forward to top out. Range: -96 to +96, with 96 Clocks Virtelnote a match. • Press Enter • Save .

Note: 56

For the shift function not edit range can be set.

Scale Track Track Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / track commands (Bank 5) / Screen. 6

Scale Track With the scale function of the value of each controller can in a track to be a certain value increased or decreased. This can be used For example, take back strong modulations or the stop dynamics increase. For this to be an important financial design medium in the post of tracks. • Select the Scale parameter and press Enter • Save : Track = 1 <SEQUENCE NAME>

Scale factor • In the top line you can enter the controller now, the to be processed: VELOCITY - Velocity RELEASE - Release Controller ModWheel - Modulation EXT CONTRL - Ext controller. PEDAL - foot pedal ALL CONTRL - All controllers VOLUME - Volume Pedal CHN PRESSR - Channel Aftertouch SUSTAIN - Sustain Pedal MIX VOLUME - Mixdown volume SOSTENUTO - Sostenuto pedal MIX PAN - Mixdown panoramic Timbral - Timbre controller PITCH BEND - Pitch Bend wheel

10-40

Page 219 KS-32 user guide

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming • With Data Entry knob and up • Yes / No • Down Cursor Now set the A factor by which the controller is to be increased or decreased. Here There are actually two parameter (fracture). Prior to the point, the count (0-9), behind the denominator (.00 - .99). While values less than 1.00, higher increase the modulation.

• Press again the right cursor and set the desired Edit range (as described previously). If the entire track editing will skip this screen easily. • If you have set everything, press Enter • Save .

Filter Events Track Commands Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / track commands (Bank 5) / Screen. 7

Filter Events The filter function can be targeted at specific events (notes, Clear controller, program change, etc.) from a track, or Post in another track to copy. The filter function has therefore two modes, Erase (Delete) and Copy (Copy). • Select the filter function and press Enter • Save : Track = 1 <SEQUENCE NAME>

Controller

ERASE MOD WHEEL

• With Data Entry knob and up • Yes / No • Down-cursor to determine here, which events are to be filtered: ModWheel - Modulation ALL CONTRL - All controllers PEDAL - foot pedal CHN PRESSR - Channel Aftertouch VOLUME - Volume Pedal MIX VOLUME - Mixdown volume SUSTAIN - Sustain Pedal MIX PAN - Mixdown panoramic SOSTENUTO - Sostenuto pedal PITCH BEND - Pitch Bend wheel Timbral - Timbre controller CHNG PROGRAM - Program Change RELEASE - Release Controller KEY PRESSR - Polyphonic aftertouch EXT CONT - Ext controller. KEY EVENTS - Only the note events

10-41

Page 220 Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

KS-32 user guide

• Press again the right cursor and set the desired Edit range (as described previously). If the entire track editing will skip this screen easily. • If you have set the range (or not), press Enter • Save . • Now you need to select the mode, erase or copy. In "COPY" the screen will look like this: Filter Mode

Controller

COPY MOD WHEEL To Track 1

• To copy the data to another track, select the Event type and the target track. • only target a certain area will be copied in the track, press the Right cursor and set the range. If not, press Simply enter • Save .

Note:

If you selected the Copy mode, shows the KS-32 after Copy the new track. Do you want the copied events from the Clear origin track, repeat the procedure with the old Track in Erase mode.

Quantize Track Track Quantize Bank Press Edit Seq / preset / Quantize Track (Bank 6) / Screen 0th

Quantize Track The Quantize function (auto-correction) can rhythmically dirty notes a track on any note value correct way. Is in the KS-32 always nachquantisiert, ie only is taken, and then quantized. You can use any note value to 1/64 triplets for quantization. • Select the Quantize function. The display shows: Current sequence or song

Indicates that the current Track contains notes

SEQ ##

Sequencer Status

STOP

QUANTIZE TRACK

10-42

Page 221 KS-32 user guide

Part 10 - Sequencer Programming • Press Enter • Save . Then appears: Track = 1 <SEQUENCE NAME>

The top line shows the track number to be edited. You can change the cursor keys this parameter. In the bottom Line is the name of the sequence or the song that is being edited. This Parameter is purely a display that can not be changed here. • Press the right cursor . The display will then: "Quantize to nearest XX. " • Use the Data Entry knob or the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor set Now the desired note value to be quantized to the: 1/4 - Quarter 1 / 4T - Quarter triplet 1/8 - Eighth 1 / 8T - eighth triplet 1/16 - sixteenth

1 / 16T - semiquaver triplets 1/32 - Zweiunddreißigstel 1 / 32T - thirty-second triplet 1/64 - sixty-fourth 1 / 64T - sixty-fourth triplet

• The note values listed are shown in musical notation. • Press the right cursor again and set the Editing a, as previously described. (You want the whole Quantize track, skip this screen easily.) • If you have set the range (or not), press Enter • Save .

Track Mute Status Mute Tracks Bank

Press Edit Seq / preset / mute tracks (Bank 7) / Screen 0th SEQ 01 Status = -PP-M-PM

Trk01 -

1 2345678 Tracks

Track Mute status This parameter determines the mute status of each of the eight Tracks the current sequence or song. The status of the current Tracks flashes. Use the left / right cursor keys or the Track buttons select to the track to be edited. Use the Data Entry Controller or the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons to select the track mute To change status.

10-43

Page 222 Part 10 - Sequencer Programming

KS-32 user guide

There are four different settings: • M - mute. The track will not play. • P - Play. This track is playing, along with other tracks Status P. • S - Solo. The current track is played alone without the other Tracks. When a track is soloed, automatically all other Tracks set to mute. But you can also buy several solo tracks hear. • "-" - bottom line. If you see a line in the display is on the corresponding track recorded anything. Have in this state Data Entry Knob and Up • Yes / No- • Down cursor Function.

10-44

Page 223 KS-32 user guide

Part 11 - Storage

Part 11 - Storage With the memory functions under Store Seqs and store sounds ( Bank 9 found) You have the following options: â&#x20AC;˘ Transfer of sound and sequence data to and from KS-32 compatible memory cards. â&#x20AC;˘ Transmission of sounds and sequences via MIDI System Exclusive messages. Memory card storage ............................................. ....................... 11-1 Insert the battery in a RAM card .................................... 11-1 Memory card configurations ............................................. .... 11-2 Formatting an empty card .............................................. ........ 11-2 Save sounds on memory card ..................................... 11-3 Informational and error messages ............................................ 11 - 4 Storing sequence data on memory card ..................... 11-5 About the sequencer memory ............................................. .......... 11-5 Informational and error messages ............................................ 11 - 6 MIDI SYS-EX-storage ........................................... ....................... 11-7 Sending MIDI Sys Ex data from the KS-32 .............................. 11-7 Send one or several sounds via MIDI Sys-Ex ................ 11-7 Send sequences / songs via MIDI Sys-Ex ......................... 11-8 Receive MIDI SysEx data ......................................... ...... 11-9

Memory card storage The KS-32 uses flat memory cards for storing sounds sequences and / songs. You can only ENSONIQ -Cards, or ENSONIQ tested cards are used. Related cards from other Manufacturer for other instruments may be incompatible and the KS-32 damage.

Insert the battery in a RAM card To extend the life of the battery, are MC-32 and MC-64 RAM cards shipped without a built-in battery. Prior to use, must be only used it so. This goes as follows. 1. Solve using the supplied Screwdriver, remove the battery compartment Screw. Let the screw stuck: it remains in the tray. 2. Gently pull on the cap 1 at the upper end of the card to the To open the battery compartment (only so far as shown in Fig. right). 3. Insert the battery with the flat side (+) side up in the Battery compartment.

Battery

Screwdriver (Supplied)

5 Battery compartment

Front Label Side of the card

4. Slide the battery compartment back to the card. 5. Tighten the screw again in order to close the tray.

Contact-edge

11-1

Page 224 Part 11 - Storage

KS-32 user guide

Memory card configurations The ENSONIQ MC-32 RAM Cards Up to two banks of sounds (CARD A and B CARD) and / or sequencer data store. There is split several ways, such as the location of a card can be. The illustration shows these configurations:

1 MC-32 (32K RAM Card)

A CARD Sounds Empty

2 A CARD Sounds CARD B Sounds

3 A CARD Sounds Sequencer Data

4 Sequencer Data

= 16k

Possible RAM card configurations • A blank memory card is copying the internal sounds (INT) automatically formatted. These 80 sounds are then in CARD A. Rest of the card remains free. • You can then again after 80 sounds CARD copy B (Fig.2) or the contents of the sequencer (Fig. 3). • A blank memory card is when you copy the sequencer Memory contents automatically formatted, and is then a pure Sequencer memory card (Fig.4).

Important :

How much space is available for sequence data available depends on how much space on the card is still unused when the first Time sequencer data is copied. That is, a blank card is then completely for sequence data. So make sure, that previously were still no sounds on the card. Have you ever Sounds on your card, and you want but then completely for sequencer data use, delete it completely by the battery again for Remove about 1 minute and then reinstated. It is also important that sounds are accessed directly from the card can while sequencer data first to the internal sequencer Storage must be reloaded before you play can.

Formatting a blank card If you used the first time the battery into a new RAM card have, the KS-32 does not recognize them only once, until it is formatted. The is easily done by a sound bank or sequencer data store. With a new card you must then decide whether You want to use it for sounds, sequences, or both, before they format.

11-2

Page 225 KS-32 user guide

Part 11 - Storage

SOUNDS Save sounds on memory card The function described here is used as a block of 80 sounds internal memory to play card, and vice versa. In Addition must, as described above, first sounds in CARD A be copied, so that the card even has sound format. If you only want one save single sound, proceed as described in Part 5 - Basics of Sound programming has been described. To dub sound banks from the internal memory to card: • Press the Edit Sound - button. • Select the store sounds at -Bank by Bank 9 press. In the Display shows:

Press

ENTER

Store

Sounds

• Press Enter • Save . Now you can select the storage type. • Use the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor enter "Storage Type = MEMORY CARD "a:

Storage MEMORY

Grade CARD

• Press Enter • Save . Now there are four possibilities: • "Operation = COPY TO CARD INT A" - this command is the full contents of the eight INT benches (0-7) stored on A CARD. • "Operation = COPY TO CARD INT B" - this command is the full contents of the eight banks IBT (0-7) stored on CARD B. • "Operation = A COPY CARD TO INT" - with this command all A CARD sounds loaded into the internal memory (INT). • "Operation = COPY CARD TO INT B" - with this command all Loading CARD B sounds to the internal memory (INT) • If you have selected the correct function, then press Enter • Save . • If the card has been empty or unformatted, and COPY TO INT CARD A is selected, you will be asked: "Card is wrong type, erase? ". Confirm with Yes • Up cursor . • Immediately after you see "Command Successful" to confirm.

11-3

Page 226 Part 11 - Storage

KS-32 user guide

Informational and error messages • "Sorry! Install a RAM card first. "- This message appears when no card or a card ROM (Read Only Memory) in the card slot infected. • "Sorry! Install a First Card. "- This message appears when no Card is inserted in the slot. • "Sorry! Write to Card A first. "- This message do you get when INT TO CARD B try without first sounds in CARD A to have saved. CARD A must always be first recorded. • "Sorry! Card B is empty. "This message appears when you CARD B TO INT try the card is formatted indeed, CARD B but no Sounds contains. • "Erase sequencer data on card?" If you INT TO CARD B try and contains the card already sequencer data in this area. Push You Up • Yes cursor , if you want to delete this sequencer data, or • No Down cursor , if you want to cancel the command. • "Sorry, write to card failed." - This message always appears when the KS-32 compares after saving card and internal data and does not recognize. This may mean that it is a ROM-card is, and can not be described. But it can also mean that the card is secured or defective • "WARNING! Battery low. See manual. "- If this message appears and puts a RAM card in the slot of the KS-32, you will informed that the battery decreases in the card and as soon as possible should be replaced. To replace the battery, you can same procedure as described at the beginning of this part. Do To do so, while the card in the slot of the KS-32 plug and the device switched ISTT, its data are retained, and are not deleted. This does not damage the card nor the KS-32. (Make sure that the KS-32 is powered on!)

11-4

Page 227 KS-32 user guide

Part 11 - Storage

SEQUENCES Storing sequence data on memory card You can save the contents of the sequencer on MC-32 RAM card. To secure sequencer data from internal memory to card: • Press the Edit SeqPreset - button. • Select the store Seqs to-Bank by Bank 9 press. In the Display shows:

Press

ENTER

Store

Sequences

• Press Enter • Save . Now you can select the storage type. • Use the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor enter "Storage Type = MEMORY CARD "a:

Storage MEMORY

Grade

CARD

• Press Enter • Save . There are two options: • "Operation = COPY ALL TO CARD" -By this command, the entire sequencer data from internal memory to card dubbed. That is the right choice when you back up your sequences and songs want. • "Operation = COPY FROM ALL CARD" - Use this command to get Sequence data from the card to the internal sequencer memory back. • If you have selected the correct function, press Enter • Save. • Immediately after you see "Command Successful" in the display as Confirmation that all went well.

Via the sequencer memory Without the optional memory expansion available in KS-32 is about 36k of RAM Memory for the sequencer available. The MC-32 RAM-memory-card However, only about 32k. This has the consequence that when attempting to To secure sequencer memory contents on Card, you may receive the message "Sorry! Need more space on Card. "Appears. This is simply a Limitation of the storage medium.

11-5

Page 228 Part 11 - Storage

KS-32 user guide To determine how much free memory must be available to all To secure sequences on card (which was formatted for sequences is):

• Press Edit Seq / Preset, followed by Control - Bank button ( Bank 1 ), and then screen 6 . • If the display shows the remaining available memory location 13% or more to the capacity of MC-32 is sufficient on each case. • If the display shows 11%, the MC-32 is not sufficient and for the "Sorry. , . "Message appears. • If the display shows 12%, the MC-32 range or not. It depends on the exact number of bytes to be stored (1% free space approximately 360 bytes).

Note:

Keep in mind that the available balance memory for devices with sequencer Extension must of course be greater. This is also true if you Sequences want to store on a card offering sounds and sequences has been formatted.

Informational and error messages • "Sorry! Install a RAM card first. "- This message appears when you ALL TO CARD try and no or a ROM card (Read Only Memory) is in the slot of the KS-32. • "Sorry! Install a Seq Card First. "- This message appears when you ALL FROM CARD and try the card is unformatted or Sound data contains. • "Erase Sound data on Card B?" - This message you see when you Sequencer data will be saved on a card that already CARD B Sounds contains. If you Up • Yes typing, these sounds will be deleted and the memory provided again for sequencer data. With Down • No remains only the rest of the remaining memory for sequencing Data left. If z. B. work with a MC-32, and already CARD A and CARD B sounds are stored on this card is on the Yes CARD B Cleared area and saved the sequencer data at this point. Press No, the process is simply broken. • "Sorry, write to card failed." - This message always appears if the KS-32 compares after saving card and internal data and does not recognize. This may mean that it is a ROM-card is, and can not be described. But it can also mean that the card is secured or defective.

11-6

Page 229 KS-32 user guide

Part 11 - Storage • "Sorry, need more space on card." - This message appears when on the card does not have enough space for the entire sequencer Memory content is left. Then try superfluous sequences or Delete songs, or delete data from the sound card. If Not both, try to back up your data via MIDI Sys Ex, is as described on the following page. • "Sorry, need expanded RAM." - This message appears when ALL FROM CARD when the internal memory is not sufficient to the content the card transfer. This is the case when sequencer data from a KS-32 transferred with expanded memory to a device without want. • "WARNING! Battery low. See manual. "- If this message appears and puts a RAM card in the slot of the KS-32, you will informed that the battery decreases in the card and as soon as possible should be replaced. To replace the battery, you can same procedure as described at the beginning of this part. Do To do so, while the card in the slot of the KS-32 infected , remain the obtain data on it, and will not be deleted. The

does not damage the card nor the KS-32. (Make sure that the KS 32 is on it!)

MIDI SYS-EX-storage Sending MIDI SysEx data from the KS-32 to an external MIDI Device The KS-32 is capable of sounds and sequencer data as system To send exclusive messages via MIDI and receive. These data can receive from another KS-32 or a MIDI system Ex-recorder (like many software sequencer or ENSONIQ EPS-16 PLUS and SD-1) are stored, to be later reloaded. Sound banks are always transferred from the internal memory via MIDI. Card sounds must therefore first loaded into the internal memory be before you can send them via MIDI dump.

SOUNDS Send one or several sounds via MIDI Sys-Ex • Press the Edit Sound button. • Select the store sounds - Bank by Bank 9 press. In the Display shows:

Press

ENTER

Store

Sounds

• Press Enter • Save . In the display you can use the storage medium search.

11-7

Page 230 Part 11 - Storage

KS-32 user guide • Use the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor set this to "Storage Type = MIDI SYS-EX "a:

Storage MIDI

Grade

SYS-EX

• Press Enter • Save . There are then two possibilities: • "Operation = SAVE INT TO MIDI" - this command is the comtents of the storage (banks 0-7) sent. These are 80 sounds. • "Operation = SAVE TO MIDI SOUND" - this command is only sent the currently selected sound via MIDI. It may consist of any Storage area come, so INT, ROM, or CARD A CARD B. • Have you left one, then press Enter • Save . The display appears "Please wait. , , sending data "while the transfer is in progress.

SEQUENCER DATA Send sequences / songs via MIDI Sys-Ex • Press the Edit Seq / Preset - button. • Select the Store Seqs -Bank to by Bank 9 press. In the Display shows:

Press

ENTER

Store

Sequences

• Press Enter • Save . The display will kuonnen the storage medium . Select • Use the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor select "Storage Type = MIDI SYS-EX "to:

Storage MIDI

Grade

SYS-EX

• Press Enter • Save . There are two options: • "Operation = SAVE CURRENT SEQ / SONG" - this command is the currently selected sequence / song sent via MIDI. • "Operation = SAVE ALL SEQUENCES" - This command is the sent entire sequencer memory contents via MIDI. Contains the dump So 70 sequences and 30 songs. • Have you left one, then press Enter • Save . The display appears "Please wait. , , sending data "during transmission.

11-8

Page 231 KS-32 user guide

Part 11 - Storage

Receive MIDI SysEx data The reception of MIDI SysEx data is done automatically when the starts sending device to transmit. This requires no special Input is required, provided that the receiving MIDI Sys-EX Data is under Screen 8 System • MIDI enabled. (Excl system = ON). If a single Sound is received via MIDI, three things happen: • The display shows "Press ENTER to Save New Sound" • The new sound ends up in the edit buffer, and • the KS-32 enters the Sound Edit mode, which by flashing corresponding LED is signaled. Then you can up the sound change before stores it in the desired location. If a single sequence o. A single song via MIDI receive is this lands on the lowest free space. The song corresponding to the lowest free song space. After that is this new sequence o. the new song dialed immediately.

11-9

Page 233 232 KS-32 user guide

Part 12 - Examples of application

Part 12 - Examples of application This part will give you a step-by-step instructions for some of the give the most common uses of the KS-32 and also discusses some further sequencer application examples, including the Application of the KS-32 with various external MIDI devices. This Part will help you become even better with the KS-32 and its To make familiar ways. Using the KS-32 with drum machines ......................................... ..... 12-1 Song Position Pointer ............................................. ............................... 12-2 MIDI Song Select ............................................. ..................................... 12-2 The KS-32 and MIDI guitar controller ........................................ ..... 12-3 Creating your own drum kits ............................................ ............. 12-4 Editing Voices ............................................... ...................... 12-5 Setting the keys scope ............................................... ........ 12-6 Save the edited drum kits ......................................... 12-7 Creating a Sequence / a preset for external MIDI sound sources .12 - 8 MIDI connectors ............................................... ........................... 12-8 Selection of Multi-mode ............................................. ............ 12-8 MIDI mode and channel - receiving instruments ...................... 12-9 MIDI track configuration ............................................. .............. 12-9

Using the KS-32 with drum machines If you operate the KS-32 together with a drum machine want, there are basically three options: 1) Synchronize the drum machine with the KS-32; 2) Synchronize the KS-32 with the drum machine, or 3) Play the Drums in the KS-32 sequencer, like other MIDI Devices also. To synchronize the drum machine with the KS-32: • Connect the MIDI Out of the KS-32 with MIDI In of the drum computer. • Set the drum machine to MIDI Clock or MIDI Sync. • Set the drum machine to a unused MIDI channel OMNI OFF; or filter, if possible, all channel information out. The sounds are not to be triggered directly. MIDI clock, Start and stop are MIDI real-time messages , irrespective of the channel be transferred. • The drum machine is now completely controlled by the KS-32. Push You play the KS-32, and the drum machine starts. To the KS-32 sync with the drum machine: • Connect the MIDI Out of the drum computer with MIDI In of the KS-32. • Ask about the KS-32 MIDI clock. Given in the Control Bank , Screen 2 Set "Clock = MIDI". • Adjust the drum machine that he no channel messages transfers, or do not give it a MIDI channel on which the KS-32 receives. Here again are clock information and start / stop Commands transmitted channel independently. • The KS-32 is now synchronized by the drum machine, and should always run with if the drum machine is running.

12-1

Page 234 Part 12 - Examples of application

KS-32 user guide

To record drums in the sequencer of the KS-32: • Connect the MIDI Out of the KS-32 with MIDI In of the drum computer. • Make sure the drum machine on Tape Sync or External Clock at least not internal or MIDI clock. This prevents that the Drum machine itself is running. He is now pure sound module. • Set the drum machine to POLY mode (OMNI OFF) and select a MIDI channel. • In the MIDI Control Bank of KS-32 give a free track the MIDI channel of the drum computer and enter as a fashion MIDI. • You should now the sounds of the drum machine on the keyboard of KS

32 have when the track is selected. You can use your rhythm Patterns now easily record in the KS-32 sequencer and save as with each MIDI expander. The advantage of this method is that some velocity-sensitive drum machine mik process much better when you get out of a dynamic keyboard be played, from the built-in drum pads. The disadvantage is that thereby sequencer memory is consumed in the KS-32.

Song Position Pointer The KS-32 sends and receives MIDI Song Position Pointer Information. Song Position Pointer say a sequencer or drum Computer, where in the song he is to be located. Receives the KS-32 such Song Position Pointer, he jumps eyeblicklich to the corresponding point in the song. The KS-32 will transmit a Song Position Pointer nformation via MIDI, if They used the auto-locate function to a certain point jump (see "Goto" in the Locate -Bank). Each receiving device, the processes this information, then also jumps to that location. (Not every device receives this Song Position Pointer. Look at the relevant owner's manual for this device when you is unclear.)

MIDI Song Select With MIDI Song Select commands, in a connected external Sequencer or drum machine, a certain song is called, when a sequence or a song is selected. Whether these commands sent and received, with the "Song Select" parameter under System • MIDI, Screen 8 determined. The KS-32 sends and receives MIDI Song Select messages both in Sequence mode, as well as in the Song mode. This allows each song Space can be selected in the KS-32 from the outside. The setting carried out as follows: MIDI song Selects # 00-99 call in the KS-32 memory locations # 00-99.

12-2

Page 235 KS-32 user guide

Part 12 - Examples of application Conversely, when you select a memory location # 00-99 in the KS-32 by MIDI Song Select # 00-99 sent.

The KS-32 and MIDI guitar controller The KS-32 is ideal as a sound module for MIDI Guitar Controller, which sends the MIDI MONO mode. The MONO mode (MIDI Mode 4) allows a guitar controller, the notes on each string to send its own MIDI channel. Only with this method, the typical expressions of the guitarist on a synthesizer be transferred. Some older Guitar Synthesizers have no MONO mode. You should look in the instruction manual of the instrument, whether it works or not. If your guitar synthesizer only in POLY mode sends (ie all six strings on a single MIDI channel) should the KS-32 also in the POLY (or OMNI) mode provides. The Guitar Synth should transmit on the channel that has the KS-32 as the base channel. For MIDI guitar controller with MONO mode offers the KS-32 two MONO different modes of. The first, MONO mode A, provides the Advantages of the MONO mode without consuming more tracks: • Connect the MIDI Out of your guitar controller (or converter) with MIDI In of the KS-32. • Tune your guitar controller MONO mode with the transmit A 1-6 channels. (For some there is a shortcut for it.) • Establish under System • MIDI, Screen 4 as the base for channel 1.

• Establish under System • MIDI, Screen 6 now the MIDI mode to "MIDI Fashion a MONO = A ". Now receives the KS-32 monophonic eight different MIDI channels, starting with the basic channel (more on this in Part 2 of this manual). Now you can call sounds or presets on the KS-32, or via MIDI Playing program change automatically dial, and the guitar controller this sounds like from the keyboard. If you are feeling more adventurous, and the various strings the guitar still want to equip with different sounds that can Try the MONO B-mode. Now each string has its own track the current sequence and receives monophonic on the corresponding MIDI channel. This mode corresponds to the MULTI mode, however, monophonic for each track. Also the program can now change the way be managed independently. • Set under System • MIDI, Screen 6 as a MIDI Mode "MONO B". The eight tracks of the current preset now receive monophonic on their MIDI channels. • Create a new preset. You might call it "MONO-B IN" or something like that, so you know that it is specifically designed for this mode is.

12-3

Page 236 Part 12 - Examples of application

KS-32 user guide

• Set the first six tracks sounds of your choice. The remainreproduced two remain empty. • Press the Edit Track button, followed by Screen 4 . Here you Koenen now set the MIDI channels of the tracks. In contrast to MONO A happens here automatically. You have six different Setting channels. Now's go. Note nor the following: • notes on one string only playing one track. Each string / track Pair is completely independent. • You can check the sound of each track either manually (using the REPLACE Track Sound function) or via MIDI program change from your Switch Controller. • Each track offers its own program change. In many cases, You probably want on all strings have the same sound. They but can also program splits, eg. as a bass sound on the E and A strings and a piano sound on the other four strings. When you like to experiment, lie times on each string to another Sound. • It would be handy abzuspeicherm the preset for this application separately (Z. B. on card), so you do not accidentally sounds in an existexisting sequence switch. • If your guitar controller certain controller on a separate Can transmit channel to affect all tracks (like a vibrato Lever) you have for a separate controller channel. This is always Base channel -1. Is the base channel 1, is the Global controller channel sixteenth

Creating your own drum kits Problem: You have a sequence with a specific drum kit created, but some voices in this kit you do not like.

Solution: You can change the voices and their keys scope change and by custom drum kits.

12-4

Page 237 KS-32 user guide

Part 12 - Examples of application

Editing Voices • Select at the drum kit that you used in your sequence, by pressing the track button on which it is located. In Part 1 - Tutorial we have a sequence with the "Big Ol 'Rock Kit" on track 1 was added. We use the same drum kit for our example. • Each time you want to edit a sound is to the KS-32 first place on the Sound Edit mode. This is done by pressing the Edit Sound - button. The display will look like this: Current number keys Lo Key

Key = C2 ELECTRIC

Hi Key

C1 : E2 KICK

Waveform name • Decide which voice (ie what kind of sound) replacing want by playing the appropriate key on the keyboard. In the Display shows the correct key, the waveform name and the Range of this voice. • When you have decided which voice is to be replaced, make sure that this can also be seen in the display (by the corresponding key on the keyboard to play). • Press Wave (bank 0) and 1 screen . The display looks like this: Waveform class

Wave = DRUM ELECTRIC

WAVE KICK

Waveform name • You can now use the Data Entry knob or the Up • Yes / Down • NoCursor through the various waveform classes, scroll to the have found the sound you want. • Press Play to listen to the sequence with the newly elected Waveform. You can scroll through the sounds, to the have found the desired sound. • If you play other keys on the keyboard, you can see the display the waveform and the waveform of the class entschprechenden voice. With data entry controller and up • Yes / No • Down cursor , you can also replace the sounds here. This applies to all 17 voices within each Drum kits.

12-5

Page 238 Part 12 - Examples of application Setting the keys scope

KS-32 user guide

The "Big Ol 'drum kit" is, like all other drum kits, 17 Different Voices divided:

Big Ol 'Rock Kit Drum Map

Electric Kick

Pedal Crash Room Open Electric Kick Room Cymbal Has Tom High Has Snare Side Reverse Closed Stick Open Ride Room Tam Metallic Crash Snare HasHas Cymbal CymbalTom Low Borine Dink SnareCowbell

Even if you have already exchanged the voices, the Keyboard range of voices still the same. In umserem example, we want to change a pair of keyboard zones. • you know: Every time you want to edit a sound that has the KS-32 stand first in the Sound Edit mode. This is done by pressing the Edit Sound button. The display looks like this: Current number keys Lo Key

Key = A4 ROOM

A4 TOM

LOW

Hi Key

: D5 # Waveform

• In our example, we will change the keyboard range for TOM ROOM LOW, HIGH and ROOM TOM SNARE SIDE STICK. • the ROOM TOM LOW on (by a key from Select A4 and D5 # key) and make sure that this sound even is shown in the display. • Press the right cursor twice, until the value for high-key flashes. • Press # C5. You just used the tonal range of the ROOM TOM LOW changed. • Now select ROOM TOM HIGH on (by a key from E5 B5 and press) and make sure that this sound in Display is shown. • Press the right cursor once to the value for low-key to select. • Press D5. The display will automatically change to high-key. Press G5. You have now the range for the ROOM TOM LOW reset. • Select the SNARE SIDE STICK to (by either C6 or press # C6) and make sure that this sound in Display is shown.

12-6

Page 239 KS-32 user guide

Part 12 - Examples of application • Press the right cursor once to the Lo Key parameters to reach. • Press # G5. The display will automatically change to high-key. We leave the value for high-key as it is. Simply press the Right Cursor twice. You have now the range for the ROOM TOM LOW reset. With this technique, you can each Drum Voice of the KS-32 in Edit range.

Save the edited drum kits • If you have your favorite drum sound found, you can Set by pressing the Enter • Save button to save. The display shows "Save SOUND <Sound name>?" (The name of the kit that allows you to to have started editing). We recommend that you edited the To give drum kit a new name so that it not later can confuse the set in ROM. • Select a name of up to 16 digits. The left / right cursor -

• Select a name of up to 16 digits. The left / right cursor Select keys on the spot during data entry control and Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons for the choice of letters Available (slide the Data Entry knob all the way down, get a space). • If you have entered the name, press Enter • Save Button. • Now select the bank and Screen - buttons to select a location for the new kit (you know: The banks 8 and 9 are fixed ROM banks for drum kits). You see here the names of the sounds on the respective memory locations are. Look for a space with a sound that you no longer need. The sounds in memory can also be listened to at this point by the COMPARE button between the stored and you are editing sound at this location forth. • Have you found the right place, you again press the Enter • Save button. Short "SAVED" appears on the display before the last Parameter appears again. Now that you have the "ultimate drum kit" is stored into memory, you need to fit it only in the corresponding track of the sequence. To do this: • Press the Track button to the original drum kit. • Press the Replace-track sound button. • Select the memory location where now the new edited Drum Set has been saved.

12-7

Page 240 Part 12 - Examples of application

KS-32 user guide

Creating a Sequence / a preset for external MIDI sound sources Task: You want to use the KS-32 to MIDI information to transferred to other MIDI devices and their sounds in a KS-32 To use sequence, or use a live set.

Solution: You can create a "pattern" preset that for this purpose is ready created. A KS-32 Sequence / Preset can also click Sounds access external devices, allowing the selection of sounds, of course, enormously increased. After you have made the necessary connections and MIDI Parameters of tracks set properly, you may all sound from the KS-32 achieve in your rack

MIDI connectors Before you can control external sounds via MIDI, you must individual instruments first connect to the KS-32 and each other. As the following figure shows:

external MIDI Device # 2 MIDI In MIDI Thru

external MIDI Device # 3

MIDI Thru

MIDI In

MIDI Thru

MIDI In

external MIDI Device # 1

to another MIDI Instruments MIDI Out

KS-32 Connect the MIDI Out of the KS-32 to the MIDI In of the first

Instrument. Then connect the MIDI Thru to the MIDI In of the second instrument. From the MIDI Thru the second it goes on to MIDI In the third instrument, and so on. With this arrangement, and the correct MIDI channels plays each Instrument only what it is to play and gives the other data to other Further instrument (MIDI Thru sockets forward incoming MIDI data just continue, however, transfer not know what the specific instrument itself plays).

Selection of Multi-mode The MULTI mode gives access to Einsazt of the KS-32 as MIDI Master Keyboard for external MIDI instruments. In MULTI mode, send 8 tracks of the current sequence / the song regardless polyphonic MIDI Information on up to 8 different channels.

12-8

Page 241 KS-32 user guide

Part 12 - Examples of application • Press System • MIDI , followed by 6 screen . The display looks like this from:

MIDI Xctrl

OMNI mode = = 02

Flashes

• Use the Up • Yes cursor a "MIDI Mode = MULTI".

MIDI mode and channel - receiving instruments The next step is that every connected MIDI instrument only MIDI receives information that are assigned to him. If each receiving device is set to a different MIDI channel (or more, for devices with MULTI mode), you can all separated from KS 32 check. For each controlled instrument: • Set POLY (OMNI OFF) or MULTI mode. Each driven instrument must be in a MIDI mode where it only a specific MIDI channel receives (or multiple). Usually, the POLY mode for reception is at one and the MULTI Fashion for reception on several unambhängigen channels. Address Refer to the information in the operating instructions for each Devices. • Select one or more MIDI channels. The best thing is every Instrument assign fixed channels and to have them adjusted. If you know for example, that a particular synthesizer always receives on channel 4, you can use the KS-32 quickly create a track and the track edit mode the MIDI status to "Status = MIDI" and "MIDI Chan = 4" position. So if you have a fixed channel scheme comply, you can be sure of getting the right tools with to hear the correct sounds. Have your personal channel scheme found please subscribe everything on and set the paper easily accessible near your KS-32.

MIDI track configuration If you made all MIDI connections and the receiving Instruments have set properly, you can now track a Setting the sequence / a preset so that MIDI data to the individual Sent instruments. Suppose you want multiple MIDI Instruments used in the sequencer, as shown in the figure on the previous page displayed.

12-9

Page 242 Part 12 - Examples of application

KS-32 user guide

For each track, which is to control an external MIDI instrument: • Press the Select Seq / Preset - button. • Press the desired Track - button. • Press the Edit Track - button. • Press the Screen 4 - button. • Use the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons to select the MIDI channel of the a receiving instrument. • Press the right cursor button. • Use the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons to select a MIDI Program number. • Press Screen 5 . • Use the Up • Yes / No • Down cursor buttons to adjust the track status "MIDI". Repeat these steps for each track, the external MIDI Should control instrument. Once you have created a template, do you save only in the KS-32: • Press the Enter • Save- button. Depending on whether you are a sequence as Have chosen pattern or not, SEQ Save message "<Seq Name>? "Or" Save Preset <Seq name>? "(The listed here Name of the sequence / the presets with the / where you started). • Select a name of up to 16 digits. The left / right cursor Select keys on the spot during data entry control and • Yes Up / Down • No-cursor - keys to select the letters Available (slide the Data Entry knob all the way down, get a space). • If you have entered the name, press Enter • Save Button. • The display briefly shows "SAVED" appears and then the last selected Parameters. After the pattern sequence has been created and saved, can She recalled at any time, by selecting the Select Seq / Preset button press, followed by the corresponding bank and Screen - keys to move the Display space.

12-10

Page 243 KS-32 user guide

Appendix - KS-32 MIDI implementation

Appendix - KS-32 MIDI implementation The KS-32 has an extensive MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) implementation. For normal applications, see all information about the MIDI functions of the KS-32 in this Instructions. You can also use the list on the Implementations consult the following page.

If you write your own computer software that work with the KS-32 should you get a full MIDI specification for the KS-32 under the following address:

Sound Accessories Audio Team GmbH Product Division Paul-Ehrlich-Str. 28-30 G3 63322 Rรถdermark Set up your written request with the exact name and address, and serial number of your instrument and source (Dealer) to this address. Delivery can take 2 - last 3 weeks.

A-1

Page 244 Appendix - KS-32 MIDI implementation

KS-32 user guide

KS-32 MIDI Implementations list MODEL: KS-32 Function ... Basic Default Channel Channel Default Fashion Messages Altered Note Number True Voice Velocity

Note ON Note OFF

Anus Touch

Key's Ch's

MIDI Implementation Chart Transmitted 1 1- 16 1

21-108

Recognized

Version: 1.0 Remarks

1 1- 16 1, 3, 4, multi-

memorized (Global Controllers in MONO mode)

21-108

Pitch Bender

Control Change

0 Bank Select MSB 1 Mod Wheel 4 Foot Volume 7 32 Bank Select LSB 64 Sustain 66 Sostenuto 71 timbre parameters

1-95 XCtrl programmable 0 Bank Select MSB 1 Mod Wheel 4 Foot 6 Data Entry * * After 100 & 101 is received Volume 7 32 Bank Select LSB 64 Sustain 66 Sostenuto 71 timbre parameters

Prog Change

71 timbre parameters 71 timbre parameters 72 Release parameters72 Release parameters 100 Registered Param 100 Select Registered Param Select 101 Registered Param 101 Select Registered Param Select 0 - 127 0-119, 123-127

True #

System Exclusive System Song Pos Common Song Sel Tune System Clock Real Time : Commands

Clock Start, Stop, Cont

Aux Local On / Off All Notes Off Measurement : Active Sense sages : Reset Notes Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY

: YES : NO

Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4: OMNI OFF MONO

A-2

Page 245

KS-32 Parameter Reference - Standard Sounds Edit Sound button Edit Seq Track Quantize Mute EffectsStore Sound Seqs Locate ControlClick Song Cmds TrackTracks CmdsCmds Store WavePitch Env1 LFO Filter Env2 Amp OutputEffectsSounds BankSet Select Sound

InternalROM A Card Card B 0

DrumsDrums Bank buttons 4

9 Screen keys

Volume Key TransChannel MIDI Pressure Pan Output poseProgram GradeSustain PedalTimbre Bus Range Status Release

In order to achieve the standard sounds-mode parameters: • Press the large Edit Sound - button. The LED above it lights up. • Press a narrow bank - button (first digit of the number) and then a broader Screen key (second digit of the number) to select the following parameters:

Wave Bank Env 2 Bank 00 -Select VOICE / Voice Status 50 -Level / Time 01 -wave Class / Individual Wave 51 -Level Velocity / Attack Vel. / Vel. Curve 02 -Delay Time / Direction 52 -mode / Keyboard Tracking 03 -Start Index / Mod Source and Amount 53 -Select Defaults 04 -Voice Restrike Decay Time 05 -Change Sound Mode Amp Bank 60 -Level / Time Pitch Bank 61 -Level Velocity / Attack Vel. / Vel. Curve 10 oct / Semi / Fine 62 -mode / Keyboard Tracking 11 -Env1 / LFO / Mod Source and Amount 63 -Select Defaults 12 Keyboard On Pitch Tracking 13 -Glide / Glide Time Output Bank 70 by volume / Boost / Mod Source and Amount 1 Env-Bank 71 Keyboard On Scale Amount / Key Range 20 -Level / Time 72 -Output bus / Priority 21 -Level Velocity / Attack Vel. / Vel. Curve 73 -Pan Location / Velocity Window 22 -mode / Keyboard Tracking 23 -Select Defaults Effects Bank Varies depending on the selected effect.

LFO Bank 30 -LFO speed / noise rate 31 -Level / Delay / Mod Source 32 -wave / restart Filter-bank 40 1 filter / filter 2

Store Sounds Bank 90 -Press ENTER to Store Sounds Screen

41 filter cutoff frequency 1/2 Envelope 42 -FC1 Keyboard / Mod Source and Amount 43 -FC2 Cutoff / Envelope 2 44 -FC2 Keyboard / FC1 Mod -> FC2 Note : There is another way to achieve the parameters by simply select the appropriate bank button repeatedly until the desired Parameter appears.

Page 246

KS-32 Parameter Reference - sequences / presets Edit Edit Seq / Preset Seq Track Quantize Mute EffectsStore Locate ControlClick Song Cmds Seqs Seq / Preset CmdsCmds TrackTracks Button Store WavePitch Env1 LFO Filter Env2 Amp OutputEffectsSounds Bank buttons

InternalROMA Card Card B 0

DrumsDrums 5

Screen keys

Edit Track Select Layer Seq / Preset Lock

Volume Key TransChannel Sustain MIDIPressure Pan Output poseProgram Grade PedalTimbre Bus Range Status Release

To achieve the sequences / presets mode parameters: • Press the large Edit Seq / Preset - button. The LED above it lights up. • Press a narrow bank - button (first digit of the number) and then a broader Screen key (second digit of the number) to select the following parameters:

Locate Bank 00 -Sequence / song Location 01 -Sequence / Song Punch In 02 -Sequence / song Punch Out 03 Punch -Auto / Tempo Control Bank 10 -Loop / Countoff 11 -Step Entry / Record 12 Punch -Auto / Clock 13 uses -Song effect from: 14 -Song Edit Tracks Displayed 15 prompt to Save Changes 16 -Total Sequencer Free Memory 17 -Reinitialize Sequencer Click-Bank 20 -Click / Interval 21 -Click Volume / Pan Click 22 tempo like Song Commands Bank 30 -Create SONG / Pset 31 -Copy song 32 -erase SONG / Pset 33 -Song Information 34 -rename SONG / Pset 35 -Copy Preset Data 36 -Edit Song Steps

Seq Commands Bank 40 -Create SEQ / Pset 41 -Copy Sequence 42 -erase SEQ / Pset 43 -Sequencer info 44 -rename SEQ / Pset 45 -Copy Preset Data 46 -Append Sequence 47 -Change Length Track Commands Bank 50 -Event Edit Track 51 -Copy Track 52 -erase Track 53 -merge Track 54 -Transpose Track 55 -shift Track 56 -scale Track 57 filter events Quantize track-bank 60 -Quantize Track Muted Tracks Bank 70 • Track Mute Status Effects Bank Varies depending on the selected effect.

Store Seqs Bank 90 -Press ENTER to Store Sequences to a card.

Note : There is another way to achieve the parameters by simply select the appropriate bank button repeatedly until the desired Parameter appears.

Page 247

KS-32 Parameter Reference - Drum Sounds Edit Sound button Edit Seq Track Quantize Mute EffectsStore Sound Seqs Locate ControlClick Song Cmds TrackTracks CmdsCmds Store WavePitch Env1 LFO Filter Env2 Amp OutputEffectsSounds BankSet

InternalROM A Card Card B 0

Select Sound

DrumsDrums Bank buttons 4

9 Screen keys

Volume Key TransChannel MIDI Pressure Pan Output poseProgram GradeSustain PedalTimbre Bus Range Status Release

There are two methods to get in the Drum Edit mode: • Change sound mode command - This is the standard method to switch between the Switch drum sound edit mode and the default sound edit mode. The Command is on the screen 05 in both edit mode. • Sound Selection - A second method to switch between the two modes and herzuspringen is easy to select different sounds. The current sound determines the Edit Mode. You can reach the drum sound edit mode by You select a drum sound ( banks 8 and 9, Screens 0 to 9) , and then the great Edit Sound button. • Press a narrow bank button (first digit of the number) and then a broader Screen - button (second digit of the number) to select the following parameters:

Wave Bank Filter-bank 00 No. -Current Key / Key Range / Wave Name 40 filter cutoff / Vel. Level Control 01 -wave class / Wave Name 02 -Direction Env2 Bank 03 -Clear Key Map In that bank, there are no parameters 04 -Set default Map 05 -Change Sound Mode Amp Bank 60 -gate time / release time Pitch Bank 61 -Level Velocity Control / Fashion 10 -Octave / Semitone / Fine Tune 11 Keyboard On Pitch Tracking Output Bank 70 -Volume / Boost / Pan Env1 Bank 71 -Output bus / Velocity Curve In that bank, there are no parameters

Effects Bank LFO Bank

Varies depending on the effect program.

In that bank, there are no parameters

Store Sounds Bank 90 -Press ENTER to Store sounds to a card.

Note : There is another way to achieve the parameters by simply select the appropriate bank button repeatedly until the desired Parameter appears.

Page 248

KS-32 Parameter Reference - Effects Edit Sound Edit Sound button Bank buttons

Edit/ Preset Quantize Mute EffectsStore Seq Locate ControlClick Song CmdsSeq Cmds TrackTracks Seqs CmdsTrack Store WavePitchEnv1 LFO Filter Env2 Amp Output EffectsSounds InternalROMA Card Card B 0

DrumsDrumsEdit Seq / Preset button 5

Screen keys Volume Key TransChannel MIDIPressure Pan Output poseProgram GradeSustain PedalTimbre Bus Range Status Release

To achieve the effect parameters in the Edit Sound Mode: • Press the Edit Sound button. The LED above it lights up. • Press the Effects button ( Bank 8 ), then a screen button (second digit of the uA speed dial numbers) in order to achieve the following parameters.

In the sequences / presets mode you reach these parameters Seq Edit / Preset, Effects (Bank8) and the Screen - keys.

CONCERT REVERB HALL REVERB

PHASE SHIFTER

80-Effect Selector / FX1 Mix / FX2 Mix ROOM REVERB 81-phase rate / phase Depth 80-Effect Selector / FX1 Mix / FX2 Mix 82 phase center / Feedback 81-Decay Time / diffusion 83 stereo Cross - Feedback 82 Detune Rate / Detune Depth 84 Phaser Level / Input Invert 83-HF Damping / RF Bandwidth 85 Mod Destination / Mod Source / Amount 84-Low Frequency Decay 85 Modulation Destination / Mod Source / Amount PHASER REVERB + 80-Effect Selector / FX1 Mix / FX2 Mix WARM-CHAMBER 81-Decay Time / HF Damping 80-Effect Selector / FX1 Mix / FX2 Mix 82-phase rate / phase Depth 81-DecayTime / diffusion 83 phase center / Feedback 82 Detune Rate / Detune Depth 84 Phaser Level / Input Invert 83-HF Damping / RF Bandwidth 85 Mod Destination / Mod Source / Amount 84 Modulation Destination / Mod Source / Amount

ROTARY SPKR + REVB 8-VOICE CHORUS

80-Effect Selector / FX1 Mix / FX2 Mix 80-Effect Selector / FX1 Mix / FX2 Mix 81-Decay Time / HF Damping 81-Chorus Rate / Chorus Depth 82 Slow Speed / Fast Speed 82 chorus Center / Feedback 83-rotor center / rotor Depth 83 Modulation Destination / Mod Source / Amount 84-Speed Mode / Mod Source

CHORUS + REVERB

DIST + CHORUS + REVB

80-Effect Selector / FX1 Mix / FX2 Mix 80-Effect Selector / FX1 Mix / FX2 Mix 81-Decay Time / HF Damping 81-Decay Time / Dist Level 82-Chorus Rate / Chorus Depth 82-Chorus Rate / Chorus Depth 83 chorus Center / Feedback 83 chorus Center / Feedback 84 Chorus Level 84 Chorus Level 85 Modulation Destination / Mod Source / Amount 85 Mod Destination / Mod Source / Amount

Flanger + REVERB 1

CMPRSS + DIST + REVB

Flanger + REVERB 2 80-Effect Selector / FX1 Mix / FX2 Mix 81-Decay Time / HF Damping 82-Flange rate / Flange Depth 83-Flange Center / Feedback 84-Flange Level / Input Invert 85 Mod Destination / Mod Source / Amount

80-Effect Selector / FX1 Mix / FX2 Mix 81-Decay Time / HF Damping 82-Flange Rate / Compression 83-Distortion Level In / Out 84 reverb to Compression Feedback 85-HiPass Cutoff / LoPass cutoff 86 Mod Destination / Mod Source / Amount

Page 249

KS-32 Parameter Reference - Edit Track & System • MIDI Edit Track button Bank buttons Edit Store Quantize MuteEffects Locate Control ClickSong CmdsTrack Cmds Seqs Seq / Preset1 2 3 CmdsSeq TrackTracks Store WavePitchEnv1LFO Filter Env2Amp Output Effects Sounds 5 6 7 Internal Card B ROMA Card DrumsDrums Edit Track 0

Replace Sound Track

Make preset Default

Layer Select Lock Record Stop Play Seq / Preset

Volume Key TransChannel MIDIPressure Sustain Pan Output poseProgram Grade PedalTimbre Bus Range Status Release Screen keys

System • MIDI

Continue System • MIDI button

In order to achieve the edit track mode parameters: • Press the small edit track - key (Speed Dial name: ET ). The LED above the Edit Track button lights, together with the Seq Edit / Preset LED. • With the larger screen - keys then obtain the following parameters:

Edit track parameters ET0 -Track Volume / Pan ET1 -Track output bus routing ET2 -Track Key Range ET3 -Track Transpose ET4 -Track MIDI Channel / Program Number ET5 -Track MIDI status ET6 -Track Pressure Type ET7 -Track Sustain Pedal Enable ET8 -Track timbre ET9 -Track Release Note : There is another way to achieve the parameters by Just the Edit Track button repeatedly until the desired parameter appears.

To achieve the system • MIDI parameters: • Press the larger System • MIDI - button (shortcut designation SM ). The LED above the button lights up. • Use the big screen buttons following parameters:

System • MIDI parameters SM0 -Master Tune / Global Bend Range SM1 -Touch Curve / Pressure Threshold SM2 -Foot Switch Left / Right Footswitch SM3 -Foot Pedal Mode / Voice muting SM4 -Base MIDI Channel / Base Channel MIDI status SM5 -Base Channel Pressure Type SM6 -MIDI Fashion / External MIDI Controller Number SM7 -MIDI Controller / Program Change System Exclusive SM8 / Song Select SM9 -MIDI Track Name / MIDI loop Note : There is another way to achieve the parameters by simply the System • MIDI button repeatedly until the desired parameter appears.

Page 250